001-022 STILO GB - Fiat Forumdownload.fiatforum.bg/Books/Stilo/Stilo_Handbook_En.pdf · Fiat Stilo technological features. You are recommended to read carefully the warnings and indications,

Dear Customer,

Thank you for selecting Fiat and congratulations on your choice of a Fiat Stilo.

We have written this handbook to help you get to know all your new Fiat Stilo features and use it in the best possible way.

You should read it right through before taking the road for the first time.

You will find information, tips and important warnings regarding the driving of your car to help you derive the maximum from yourFiat Stilo technological features.

You are recommended to read carefully the warnings and indications, marked with the respective symbols, at the end of the page:

personal safety;

the car’s wellbeing;

environmental protection.

The enclosed Warranty Booklet lists the services that Fiat offers to its Customers:

❒ the Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for maintaining its validity

❒ the range of additional services available to Fiat Customers.

Best regards and good motoring!

This Owner Handbook describes all Fiat Stilo versions. As a consequence, you should consider only the information which is related to the engine and bodywork version of the car you purchased.

MUST BE READ!

�

K

REFUELLING

Petrol engines: only refuel with unleaded petrol with octane rating (RON) not less than 95 conforming to the Eu-ropean specification EN 228.

Diesel engines: only refuel with diesel fuel conforming to the European specification EN590. The use of other prod-ucts or mixtures may irreparably damage the engine with invalidation of the warranty due to the damage caused.

ENGINE STARTING

Petrol engines with mechanical gearbox: make sure that the handbrake is engaged; set the gearshift lever toneutral; fully depress the clutch without pressing the accelerator, then turn the ignition key to AVV and release it assoon as the engine has started.

Petrol engines with Selespeed gearbox: keep the brake pedal fully depressed; turn the ignition key to AVV andrelease it as soon as the engine has started; the transmission sets to neutral automatically.

Diesel engines: turn the ignition key to MAR and wait for the warning lights Y and m to go off; turn the igni-tion key to AVV and release it as soon as the engine has started.

PARKING ON FLAMMABLE MATERIAL

While working, the catalyst develops a very high temperature. Do not park the car over grass, dry leaves, pine nee-dles or any other inflammable materials: risk of fire.

RESPECTING THE ENVIRONMENT

The car is fitted with a system that allows continuous diagnosis of the components correlated with emissions to en-sure better respect for the environment.

ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES

If, after buying the car, you decide to add electrical accessories (that will gradually drain the battery), visit a FiatDealership. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the car’s electric system can sup-port the required load.

CODE card

Keep the code card in a safe place, not in the car. The code card shall be used for requesting additional keys.

SCHEDULED SERVICING

Correct maintenance of the car is essential for ensuring it stays in tip-top condition and safeguards its safety fea-tures, its environmental friendliness and low running costs for a long time to come.

THE OWNER HANDBOOK CONTAINS…

… information, tips and important warnings regarding the safe, correct driving of your car, and its maintenance. Payparticular attention to the symbols " (personal safety) # (environmental protection) ! (the car’s wellbeing).

�

4

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

DASHBOARD ........................................................................ 5

INSTRUMENT PANEL ......................................................... 6

SYMBOLS ................................................................................. 8

THE FIAT CODE SYSTEM................................................... 8

THE KEYS ................................................................................ 10

ALARM ..................................................................................... 17

IGNITION SWITCH.............................................................. 20

INSTRUMENTS....................................................................... 21

MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY ............................................. 23

TRIP COMPUTER ................................................................. 34

SEATS ........................................................................................ 37

HEAD RESTRAINTS .............................................................. 41

STEERING WHEEL ............................................................... 42

REARVIEW MIRRORS........................................................... 43

HEATING/CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM .................... 44

HEATING AND VENTILATION ....................................... 46

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM .................... 48

AUTOMATIC TWO-ZONECLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM ......................................... 51

EXTERNAL LIGHTS .............................................................. 57

WINDOW WASHING......................................................... 60

CRUISE CONTROL ............................................................. 64

CEILING LIGHTS .................................................................. 67

CONTROLS ........................................................................... 68

INTERIOR FITTINGS ............................................................ 70

“SKYWINDOW”(BLADE SUNROOF) ........................... 74

DOORS .................................................................................... 79

POWER WINDOWS ........................................................... 80

BOOT ........................................................................................ 81

BONNET .................................................................................. 92

ROOF RACK/SKI RACK ..................................................... 93

HEADLIGHTS.......................................................................... 94

ABS SYSTEM ........................................................................... 95

ESP SYSTEM ............................................................................ 97

EOBD SYSTEM ....................................................................... 99

SOUND SYSTEM.................................................................... 100

ACCESSORIES PURCHASED BY THE OWNER ......... 101

“DUALDRIVE” ELECTRIC POWERSTEERING SYSTEM .............................................................. 102

PARKING SENSORS ............................................................ 103

AT THE FILLING STATION .............................................. 105

PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT ............................ 108

DDAASSHHBBOOAARRDD AANNDD CCOONNTTRROOLLSS

DASHBOARD

The presence and the position of the instruments and warning lights may vary according to the versions.

1. Side window air vent - 2. Adjustable and swivel air vent - 3. External light stalk - 4. Instrument panel - 5. Adjustable and swivelair vent - 6. Hazard light switch - 7. Sound system controls - 8. Front passenger air bag - 9. Upper glovebox - 10. Lower glovebox- 11. Controls for heating, ventilation and climate control - 12. Windscreen/rear window wiper/trip computer stalk - 13. Ignitionkey and ignition switch - 14. Driver air bag - 15. Steering wheel locking/release stalk - 16. Control unit access door - 17. Bonnetopening lever - 18. Set of switches for lights and menu opening/setting.

5

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

F0C0155m

fig. 1

6

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS INSTRUMENT PANEL 1.416V - 1.616V - 1.816V versions

A Rev counter

B Engine coolant temperature gauge andexcessive temperature warning light

C Fuel level gauge with reserve warninglight

D Speedometer (speed indicator)

E Multifunction display.

The rev counter of versions with Sele-speed transmission is fitted with warninglight t.

1.9 Multijet versions

A Rev counter





The rev counter of versions with Sele-speed transmission is fitted with warninglight t.

F0C0521m

F0C0522m

fig. 3

fig. 2

7

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS2.420V Selespeed Abarth versions

A Rev counter





F0C0523m

fig. 4

8

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS SYMBOLS

Special coloured labels have been attachednear or actually on some of the compo-nents of your car. These labels bear sym-bols that remind you of the precautionsto be taken as regards that particular com-ponent.

The plate summarising the symbols usedcan be found under the bonnet fig. 5.

THE FIAT CODE SYSTEM

To further protect you car from theft, ithas been fitted with an engine immobilis-ing system. This system is automatically ac-tivated when the ignition key is removed.

An electronic device, in fact, is fitted ineach ignition key grip. The device trans-mits a radio-frequency signal when the en-gine is started through a special aerial builtinto the ignition switch. The modulate sig-nal, which changes each time the engine isstarted, is the “password” by means ofwhich the control unit recognises the keyand enables to start the engine.

fig. 5 F0C0145m

9

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSOPERATION

Each time the car is started turning the ig-nition key to MAR, the Fiat CODE sys-tem control unit sends a recognition codeto the engine control unit to deactivatethe inhibitor.

The code is sent only if the Fiat CODEsystem control unit has recognised thecode transmitted from the key.

Each time the ignition key is turned toSTOP, the Fiat CODE system deactivatesthe functions of the engine electronic con-trol unit.

If the code has not been recognised cor-rectly, the instrument panel warning lightY will turn on.

In this case, the key should be moved tothe STOP position and then back toMAR; if the lock continues, possibly tryagain with the other key provided with thecar. If it is still not possible to start the carcontact a Fiat Dealership.

IMPORTANT Every key has its own code,which must be memorised by the systemcontrol unit. To memorise new keys, upto a maximum of eight, apply solely to Fi-at Dealership taking with you the CODEcard and the keys, a personal identity doc-ument and the car’s ownership docu-ments. The codes of the keys not provid-ed during the new memorising procedureare erased from the memory. This is toensure that any lost or stolen keys can nolonger be used to start the car.

The electronic components in-side the key may be damagedif the key is submitted to sharpknocks.

Warning light Y coming on when driving

❒ If the warning light Y turns on, thismeans that the system is running a self-test (for example for a voltage drop).

❒ If the warning light Y continues to stayon, contact a Fiat Dealership.

10

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS THE KEYS

CODE CARD

Together with the keys you will receivethe CODE card fig. 6 to be presented toFiat Dealership when requesting additionalkeys.

IMPORTANT In order to ensure perfectefficiency of the electronic devices con-tained inside the keys, they should neverbe exposed to direct sunlight. KEY WITHOUT REMOTE

CONTROL (where provided)

The key is fitted with a metal insert A-fig. 7, operating:

❒ the ignition switch

❒ doors and tailgate locks

❒ the fuel lid locking/unlocking (on ver-sions featuring fuel filler cap with lock)

❒ windows and Skywindow sunroof(where provided) opening/closing

❒ the dead lock device (where provided)

❒ the switch to deactivate the passenger’sair bag and rear side bags (where pro-vided).

All the keys and the CODEcard must be handed over tothe new owner when sellingthe car.

fig. 6 F0C0001m fig. 7 F0C0508m

11

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

KEY WITH REMOTE CONTROL

The key is fitted with a metal insert A-fig. 8, operating:

❒ the ignition switch

❒ doors and tailgate locks

❒ the fuel lid locking/unlocking (on ver-sions featuring fuel filler cap with lock)

❒ windows and Skywindow sunroof(where provided) opening/closing

❒ the dead lock device (where provided)

❒ the switch to deactivate the passenger’sair bag and rear side bags (where pro-vided).

fig. 8 F0C0327m

Button Ë for remote unlocking of doors,tailgate and fuel filler cap. Button Á for re-mote locking of doors, tailgate and fuelfiller cap. Button R for remote open-ing of the tailgate. Button B for power-as-sisted opening of the metal insert A.

To refit the metal insert into the key grip,keep button B pressed and turn the met-al insert in the direction shown by the ar-row until hearing the click as it locks intoplace. Then release button B. Led C(where provided) comes on when send-ing the control to the alarm system re-ceiver. To know the operating logics ofthe key with remote control and everypossible and modifiable setting, see para-graph “Alarm” in this section.

If locking button Á is inadver-tently pressed from the pas-senger compartment, when

getting out of the car only the doorsbeing used will unlock; the tailgate willstay locked. To realign the system,press again the locking/unlocking but-tons Á /Ë.

Button B-fig. 8 should onlybe pressed when the key is

away from the body, in particularfrom the eyes and from objects thatcan be spoilt (e.g. clothes). Make surethe key can never be touched by oth-ers, especially children, who may in-advertently press the button.

WARNING

12

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

Opening the doors and the tailgate

Briefly press button Ë for remote un-locking of doors and tailgate and simulta-neous alarm (where provided) deactiva-tion, timed switching on of the internalceiling lights and double flashing of direc-tion indicators (for versions/marketswhere applicable).

Press button Ë for more than 2 secondsto open the windows and the Skywindow(where provided).

For Multi Wagon versions, pressing twicerapidly button R will open the rearwindow lid (where provided).

Once doors are unlocked, if you do notopen one door or the tailgate within fewseconds, the system will lock all doors/tail-gate again automatically.

Doors will be unlocked automatically if thefuel inertial cut-off switch comes into op-eration.

Locking the doors and the tailgate

Briefly press button Á for remote lock-ing of doors and tailgate and simultaneousalarm (where provided) activation, switch-ing off of the internal ceiling lights and sin-gle flashing of direction indicators.

Press button Á for more than 2 secondsto open the windows and the Skywindow(where provided). If the button is brieflypressed twice, the dead lock device is ac-tivated (see next paragraph “Dead lockdevice”).

If one or more doors are open locking willnot be activated and the door led A-fig.11 and direction indicators will flash rapid-ly. If only the tailgate is open the doors willlock.

fig. 9 F0C0408m

13

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSOpening the tailgate by the

remote control

Press and keep button R pressed toopen the tailgate by remote control evenif the alarm (where provided) is on.

Opening the tailgate is accompanied by thedirection indicators flashing twice; clos-ing is accompanied by a single flash only ifthe alarm is on.

If the alarm is on, when the tailgate isopened the alarm system switches off vol-umetric protection and the tailgateperimetral protection sensor.

IMPORTANT If the remote control doesnot work properly, it is still possible tocarry out the above mentioned operationsby using the metal insert of the key.

When closing the tailgate again, volumet-ric and perimetral protection sensors arerestored.

Leds on the driver’s door

When locking the doors, led A-fig. 11switches on for about 3 seconds and thanstarts flashing (deterrence function).

Once doors are locked, if one or moredoors or the tailgate are not closed cor-rectly, the led and direction indicatorsstart flashing quickly.

fig. 11 F0C0138m

Opening the rear heated windowlid (MultiWagon versions)

On MultiWagon versions, pressing twicebutton R rapidly, obtains opening of therear heated window lid (see fig. 10).

fig. 10 F0C0414m

14

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

Replacing the battery of the key with remote control

If, when pressing button Ë, Á, or R, theled F-fig. 12 (where provided) on the keyflashes briefly only once, the batteryshould be replaced with an equivalent onethat can be purchased at common stores.

Battery replacement:

❒ press button A and move the metal in-sert B to open position;

❒ turn the screw C to : using a fine bitscrewdriver;

❒ take out the battery case D and replacethe battery E making sure that the biasis correct;

❒ re-insert the battery holder D in thekey and lock it turning the screw C to;.

Request for additional remotecontrols

The system can recognise up to 8 remotecontrols. Should a new remote control benecessary, contact a Fiat Dealership, tak-ing with you the CODE card, a personalidentity document and the car’s owner-ship documents.

DEAD LOCK DEVICE (where provided)

This safety device enables to inhibit:

❒ door internal handles and safety lockbutton;

❒ button A-fig. 13 for locking/unlockingthe doors, placed on the driver doorpanel mask;

thus hindering doors opening from insidethe passenger’s compartment in case of at-tempt to break-into (e.g. window breaking).

The dead lock device guarantees the bestprotection against unwanted access. There-fore, it should be actuated every time thecar is parked and left unattended.

fig. 12 F0C0037m

Used batteries are harmful tothe environment. They shouldbe disposed of as specified bylaw in the special containers

provided, or take them to a Fiat Deal-ership, which will deal with their dis-posal.

fig. 13 F0C0142m

15

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSDevice activation

The device is automatically activated onevery door in the following cases:

❒ turning twice the key without remotecontrol (where provided) in closing di-rection;

❒ pressing twice button Áof the key withremote control.

Device activation is signalled by threeflashings of the direction indicators andflashing of the led on the driver door pan-el (see the table on next page).

If one of the doors is not perfectly closed,the dead lock device will not activate, thuspreventing that a person getting into thecar from the open door remains blockedinside the passenger’s compartment whenshe/he closes the door.

Device deactivation

The device is deactivated automatically onevery door in the following cases:

❒ when unlocking the doors;

❒ when unlocking only the driver’s door;

❒ when turning the ignition key to MAR.

Once the dead lock devicehas been actuated, doors

cannot be opened from inside the carin any way whatsoever. For this rea-son, make sure there are no personsleft inside the car.

WARNING

If the battery of the key withremote control is down, the

dead lock device can only be activat-ed through the metal insert of the keyin the revolving plugs of the doors asdescribed previously: in this case thedead lock device is active only on therear doors.

WARNING

16

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS The main functions that can be activated with the keys (with or without remote control) are the following:

Door opening

Key turning counterclockwise(driver side) orclockwise(passenger side)

Key turning counterclockwise(driver side) orclockwise(passenger side)

Pressing brieflybutton Ë

Two flashings

Deterrence ledturning off

Door closing

Key turning clockwise(driver side) orcounterclockwise(passenger side)

Key turning clockwise (driver side) orcounterclockwise(passenger side)

Brief press onbutton Á

1 flashing

Turned on fixed forapprox. 3 secondsand followed by de-terrence led flashing

Window andSkywindow

opening (whereprovided)

Turning (> 2 seconds) in openingposition (counterclockwisedriver side; clock-wise passenger side)

Turning (> 2 seconds) in openingposition (counter-clockwise driverside; clockwise passenger side)

Prolonged pressing(> 2 seconds) onbutton Ë

Two flashings

Turning offdeterrence led

Window andSkywindow

closing (whereprovided)

Turning (> 2 seconds) in closingposition (clockwisedriver side; counterclockwisepassenger side)

Turning (> 2seconds) in closingposition (clockwisedriver side; counterclockwisepassenger side)

Prolonged pressing(> 2 seconds) onbutton Á

1 flashing

Deterrence ledflashing

Dead lock(where

provided)

Double key rotation in closing direction(clockwise driverside; counterclock-wise passenger side)

Double key rotation in closing direction(clockwise driverside; counterclock-wise passenger side)

Double pressing onbutton Á

3 flashings

Double flashing andthen deterrent ledflashing

Tailgateopening

Key rotationclockwise

Key rotationclockwise

Prolonged press-ing (> 2 seconds)on button R

Two flashings

Deterrent ledflashing

Type ofkey

Key withoutremote control (where provided)

Key withremote control

Directionindicatorsflashing(only withkey with remote control)

Led ondriver door

17

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSALARM

(where provided)

The alarm function is provided in additionto all remote control functions previous-ly described and it is controlled by the re-ceiver located under the dashboard, nextto the fuse box.

WHEN THE ALARM ISTRIGGERED

The alarm comes into action in the fol-lowing cases:

❒ unlawful opening of one of the doors,bonnet or boot (perimetral protec-tion);

❒ attempt to start the engine (turning theignition key to MAR);

❒ battery cable cutting;

❒ presence of moving bodies in the pas-senger’s compartment (volumetric pro-tection);

❒ abnormal raising/sloping of the car.

Depending on the markets, the cutting inof the alarm causes operation of the sirenand direction indicators (for about 26 sec-onds). The ways of operating and the num-ber of cycles may vary depending on themarkets.

A maximum number of sound/sight cyclesis however envisaged.

Volumetric and anti-raising protectionscan be cut off by operating the front ceil-ing light controls (see paragraphs “Volu-metric protection sensors” and “Anti-rais-ing sensor” on the following pages).

IMPORTANT The engine immobiliserfunction is guaranteed by the Fiat CODEsystem, which is automatically activatedwhen the ignition key is removed.

HOW TO ACTIVATE THEALARM

With the doors, bonnet and boot shut andthe ignition key in the STOP position orwith the key removed, point the key withremote control in the direction of the car,then press and release the button Á.

With the exception of certain markets,the system sounds a “beep” and the doorsare locked.

Engagement of the alarm is preceded bya self-diagnostic test. If a fault is detectedthe system sounds a further warning“beep” and the display shows the relevantmessage (see section “Warning lights andmessages”).

In this case, switch the alarm system off bypressing button Ë, check that the doors,bonnet and tailgate are properly shut, thenswitch the alarm on again by pressing but-ton Á.

Otherwise, the door, bonnet or tailgatethat is not shut properly will be excludedfrom the alarm system control.

18

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

If the doors, bonnet and boot are shutcorrectly and the control signal is repeat-ed, the system self-diagnostics has de-tected a system operating fault. It is there-fore necessary to contact Fiat Dealership.

IMPORTANT When operating the cen-tral door locking with the metal insert A-fig. 14 of the key, the alarm is not acti-vated.

IMPORTANT The electronic alarm is builtin compliance with the law and regulationsof the different countries.

HOW TO DEACTIVATE THE ALARM

Press button Ë of the key with remotecontrol.

The system will react as follows (with theexception of certain markets):

❒ two brief flashes of the direction indi-cators;

❒ two brief “beeps”;

❒ door unlocking.

IMPORTANT Operating the central doorlocking with the metal insert of the keywill not deactivate the alarm.

VOLUMETRIC PROTECTIONSENSORS

The volumetric sensors are inside thefront ceiling light in the passenger’s com-partment. To make sure that the volu-metric sensors are working properly,check that doors, boot, bonnet, windowsand Skywindow (where provided) areshut.

Volumetric protectiondeactivation

If it is necessary to switch on the alarmwhen animals or people are in the car,press button A-fig. 15 on the front ceil-ing light to deactivate the volumetric pro-tection.

Deactivation is needed also in the pres-ence of additional independent heater andwhen it is switched on with the remotecontrol.

Protection cut-out stays on until activat-ing the central door opening again.

fig. 14 F0C0335m fig. 15 F0C0286m

19

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSANTI-RAISING SENSOR

The anti-raising sensor detects any ab-normal car raising/sloping, even partial(e.g.: attempt to remove a wheel).

This sensor can detect the smallest carsideslip angle changes, both longitudinallyand transversally.

Sideslip angle changes lower than 0.5°/min.(e.g.: slow tyre flattening) are not consid-ered.

Anti-raising protectiondeactivation

To deactivate the anti-raising protection(for example when towing the car withalarm on) press button A-fig. 16 on thefront ceiling light. Sensor cut-out stays onuntil activating the central door openingagain.

INDICATIONS OF ATTEMPTS TO BREAK IN

Any attempt to break in is indicated bywarning light Y on the instrument pan-el with the relevant message on the dis-play (see section “Warning lights and mes-sages”).

HOW TO CUT OFF THE ALARMSYSTEM

To deactivate the alarm system com-pletely (for instance during prolonged in-activity of the car) simply lock the carturning the metal insert of the key with re-mote control in the lock.

IMPORTANT To cut-out the electronicalarm if remote control batteries aredown or the system is failing, fit the keyinto the ignition switch and turn it toMAR.

fig. 16 F0C0287m

20

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS IGNITION SWITCH

The key can be turned to 3 different po-sitions:

❒ STOP: engine off, key can be removed,steering column locked. Certain elec-trical devices (e.g.: sound system, cen-tral door locking, electronic alarm, etc.)can work.

❒ MAR: driving position. All electrical de-vices are powered.

❒ AVV: engine starting.

The ignition switch is fitted with a safetymechanism that, in the event the engine isnot started, compels the driver to turn theignition key back to STOP before re-peating the starting operation.

STEERING COLUMN LOCK

Engaging

When the key is at STOP remove thekey and turn the steering wheel until itlocks.

Disengaging

Rock the steering wheel slightly as youturn the ignition key to MAR.

fig. 17 F0C0164m

If the ignition device is tam-pered with (e.g.: attempted

theft), have it checked over by a FiatDealership before restarting to drive.

WARNING

When getting out of the car,always remove the key to

prevent any occupants from acci-dentally activating the controls. Re-member to engage the handbrakeand if the car is parked on uphill slopeto engage the first gear. If the car isfacing downhill, engage the reversegear. Never leave unsupervised chil-dren in the car.

WARNING

It is absolutely forbidden tocarry out whatever after-

market operation involving steeringsystem or steering column modifica-tions (e.g.: installation of anti-theftdevice) that could badly affect per-formance and safety, cause the lapseof warranty and also result in non-compliance of the car with homolo-gation requirements.

WARNING

Never remove the ignitionkey while the car is moving.

The steering wheel would automati-cally lock as soon as you try to turnit. This also applies when the car isbeing towed.

WARNING

21

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSINSTRUMENTS

REV. COUNTER fig. 18a

The rev counter shows engine rpm. Theneedle pointed to the red area (danger)indicates excessive high engine speed. Donot drive for long periods with the needlein this area.

IMPORTANT The electronic injection con-trol system gradually shuts off the flow offuel when the engine is “over-revving” re-sulting in a gradual loss of engine power.

When the engine is idling, the rev countermay indicate a gradual or sudden speed in-crease. This is normal as it takes place dur-ing normal operation, for example whenactivating the climate control system orthe fan. In particular a slow change in thespeed preserves the battery charge.

fig. 18a F0C0527mfig. 18 F0C0530m

SPEEDOMETER fig. 18

It shows the car speed.

22

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

If the needle reaches the redarea, stop the engine immedi-ately and contact a Fiat Deal-ership.

fig. 19 F0C0528m

ENGINE COOLANTTEMPERATURE GAUGE

This shows the temperature of the enginecoolant fluid and begins working when thefluid temperature exceeds approx. 50°C.

Under normal conditions, the needleshould move to different positions of thescale according to the conditions of use ofthe car.

C - Low engine coolant temperature.

H - High engine coolant temperature.

FUEL LEVEL GAUGE

This shows the amount of fuel left in thefuel tank.

The reserve warning light B- fig. 19 turnson to indicate that approx. 8 litres of fuelare left in the tank.

E - tank empty.

F - tank full (see the indications given inparagraph “At the filling station").

Do not travel with the fuel tank almostempty: the gaps in fuel delivery could dam-age the catalyst.

IMPORTANT If the needle sets at E withwarning light B flashing, it means that thesystem is malfunctioning. Contact a FiatDealership to have the system inspected.

The turning on of the warning light A-fig.19 (together with the message shown onthe display) indicates that the coolant flu-id temperature is too high; in this case,stop the engine and contact a Fiat Deal-ership.

23

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSMULTIFUNCTION

DISPLAY

Your car is fitted with the multifunctiondisplay that shows all the useful informa-tion necessary when driving.

INFORMATION ON“STANDARD” SCREEN fig. 20

The standard screen shows the followingindications:

A Date

B Dualdrive electric power steering en-gagement, if any

C Selespeed mode (where provided) andengaged gear display

D Clock

E Odometer (covered km or miles)

F External temperature

G Headlight aiming position (only withdipped beam headlights on)

CONTROL BUTTONS fig. 21

Õ To scroll the display and the relatedoptions upwards or to increase thevalue displayed.

MODE Brief press to open the menuand/or to move to next screen or to con-firm the option required.

Long press to go back to the standardscreen.

Ô To scroll the display and the related op-tions downwards or to decrease thevalue displayed.

Note Buttons Õ and Ô activate differentfunctions according to the following situ-ations:

– to scroll the menu options upwards anddownwards;

– to increase or to decrease values duringsettings.

fig. 21 F0C0022mfig. 20 F0C3245g

24

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS SETUP MENU fig. 22

The menu comprises a series of functionsarranged in a “circular fashion” which canbe selected through buttons Õ and Ô toaccess the different select operations andsettings (setup) given below. For certainoptions (Set time and Units) there is a sub-menu.

The setup menu can be activated by press-ing briefly button MODE.

Single presses on buttons Õ or Ô willscroll the setup menu options. Handlingmodes differ with each other according tothe characteristic of the option selected.

Note If the car is equipped with Con-nect/Navigator, phone and audio info canbe repeated on the multifunction display.For other set-up menu adjustments and/orsettings, see the Connect/Navigator Sup-plement.

Selecting an option in the main menu without submenu:

– press briefly button MODE to selectthe menu option to set;

– press buttons Õ or Ô (by single press-es) to select the new setting;

– press briefly button MODE to store thenew setting and to go back to the previ-ously selected menu option.

Selecting an option in the main menu withsubmenu:

– press briefly button MODE to displaythe first submenu option;

– press buttons Õ or Ô (by single press-es) to scroll all submenu options;

– press briefly button MODE to selectthe displayed submenu option and to en-ter the relevant setup menu;


– press briefly button MODE to store thenew setting and to go back to the previ-ously selected submenu option.

25

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSSelecting “Set date” and “Set time”:

– briefly press button MODE to selectthe first value to change (e.g. hours /min-utes or year / month / day);


– briefly press button MODE to store thenew setting and to go to the next setupmenu option, if this is the last one you willgo back to the previously selected optionof the main menu.

Press button MODE for long:

– to quit the submenu if you are at sub-menu option setting level;

– to quit the main menu if you are at sub-menu level;

– to quit the main menu if you are at mainmenu option setting level;

– to quit the set up menu if you are in themain menu;

– only settings stored yet by the user (andconfirmed by pressing briefly buttonMODE) will be saved.

The setup menu displaying is timed; whenquitting the menu due to timing expiry,only settings stored yet by the user (andconfirmed by pressing briefly buttonMODE) will be saved.

26

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

Day

Year Month

Español

English

Portuges

Deutsch

Français

Italiano

EXIT MENU

TRIP B DATA SET TIMESET DATE

SEE RADIO

KEY

AUTOCLOSE

UNITS

LANGUAGEBUZZER VOLUMEBUTTON VOL.

BELT BUZZER

SERVICE

SPEED BEEP

Briefly press button MODE to start surfing from the standardscreen. To surf the menu use buttons Õ or Ô. For safety rea-sons, when the car is running, it is possible to access only thereduced menu (for setting the “Speed limit” and “Automaticheadlight sensor sensitivity adjustment” (where provided).When the car is stationary access to the whole menu is en-abled. On cars provided with Connect/Navigator many func-tions are displayed on the navigator display.

MODEbriefly press button

MODEbriefly press button

Example:

fig. 22

HEADL. SENSOR

F0C2369g

27

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSSpeed limit (Speed Beep)

With this function it is possible to set thecar speed limit (km/h or mph); when thislimit is exceeded the driver is immediate-ly alerted (see section “Warning lights andmessages”).

To set the speed limit, proceed as follows:

– briefly press button MODE, the displaywill show wording (Speed Beep);

– press button Õ or Ô to select activa-tion (On) or deactivation (Off) of thespeed limit;

– if selecting (On), press button Õ or Ôto select the required speed limit and thenpress MODE to confirm.

Note The possible setting is between 30and 250 km/h, or between 20 and 155mph depending on the unit set previous-ly (see paragraph “Distance unit (Dis-tances)” described later. Every press onbutton Õ/Ô increases/decreases by 5units. Keeping the button Õ/Ô pressedobtains the automatic fast increase or de-crease. When you are near the requiredsetting complete adjustment by singlepresses.

– briefly press button MODE to go backto the menu screen or press the buttonfor long to go back to the standard screenwithout storing settings.

To abort the setting, proceed as follows:

– briefly press button MODE: (On) willflash on the display;

– press button Ô: (Off) will flash on thedisplay;


Automatic headlight sensorsensitivity adjustment (Headl. sensor) (where provided)

With this function it is possible to adjustthe light sensor sensitivity according to 3levels (level 1 = min. level, level 2 = av-erage level, level 3 = max. level); the high-er the sensitivity is, the lower is the ex-ternal light intensity required to switch onthe lights.

This operation can be performed also withthe car moving.

To set the light level required, proceed asfollows:

– briefly press button MODE, the previ-ously set level will flash on the display;

– press button Õ or Ô to select the re-quired level;


28

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS Trip B On/Off (TripB data)

Through this option it is possible to acti-vate (On) or deactivate (Off) the Trip B(partial trip) (for further information see“Trip computer”).

For activation / deactivation, proceed asfollows:

– briefly press button MODE: (On) or(Off) will flash on the display (according toprevious setting);

– press button Õ or Ô for setting;


Setting the clock (Set time)

This function enables to set the clockthrough two submenus: “Time” and“Mode”.

To set the clock proceed as follows:

– briefly press button MODE, the displaywill show the two submenus “Time” and“Mode”;

– press button Õ or Ô to scroll the twosubmenus;

– select the required submenu and thenpress briefly MODE;

– if selecting “Time”: briefly press buttonMODE, “hours” will flash on the display;


– press button MODE, “minutes” willflash on the display;

– press button Õ or Ô for setting.

– if selecting “Mode”: briefly press but-ton MODE, “12h” or “24h” will flash onthe display;

– press button Õ or Ô to select “24h” or“12h”.

After setting, briefly press button MODEto go back to the submenu screen orpress the button for long to go back to themain menu screen without storing set-tings.

– press again button MODE for long togo back to the standard screen or to themain menu according to the current menulevel.

29

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSSetting the date (Set date)

This function enables to update the date(day – month – year).

To correct the date proceed as follows:

– briefly press button MODE: “year” willflash on the display;


– briefly press button MODE: “month”will flash on the display;


– briefly press button MODE: “day” willflash on the display;

– press button Õ or Ô for setting.

Note Every press on button Õ or Ô in-creases/decreases by 1 unit. Keeping thebutton pressed obtains automatic fast in-crease or decrease. When you are nearthe required setting complete adjustmentby single presses.


Audio info repetition (See radio)

With this function the display repeats in-formation relevant to the sound system.

– Radio: selected radio station frequencyor RDS message;

– Audio CD/MP3 CD: CD and/or tracknumber;

To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off)sound system info displaying proceed asfollows:

– briefly press button MODE: (On) or(Off) will flash on the display (according toprevious setting);



Door opening mode (Key)

This function enables to select the re-quired door opening mode:

– briefly press button MODE, the displaywill show the wording “Key”;

– press button Õ or Ô to select option“Open doors” or “Open all”;


– “Open doors”: press button Ë to openthe doors (excluding the tailgate);

– “Open all”: press button Ë to open thedoors and the tailgate.

30

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS Automatic central door locking

when travelling (Autoclose)

When activated (On), this function locksautomatically the doors when the carspeed exceeds 20 km/h.

To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off) thisfunction proceed as follows:

– briefly press button MODE, the displaywill show the wording “Travelling”. Word-ings On or Off will flash (according to pre-vious setting);



Setting units (Units)

With this function it is possible to set theunits through three submenus: “Dis-tances”, “Consumption” and “Tempera-ture”.

To set the required unit proceed as fol-lows:

– briefly press button MODE, the displaywill show the three submenus;

– press button Õ or Ô to scroll the threesubmenus;

– select the required submenu and thenpress briefly button MODE;

– if selecting “Distances”: pressing buttonMODE briefly, the display will show “km”or “mi” (according to previous setting);


– if selecting “Consumption”: pressing but-ton MODE briefly, the display will show“km/l ”, “l/100km” or “mpg” (according toprevious setting);

If set unit is “km”, the display will show fu-el consumption in km/l or l/100km.

If set unit is “mi” the display will show fu-el consumption in “mpg”.


– if selecting “Temperature”: pressing but-ton MODE briefly, the display will show“°C” or “°F” (according to previous set-ting);

– press button Õ or Ô to select the re-quired level;

31

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSAfter setting, briefly press button MODE

to go back to the submenu screen orpress the button for long to go back to themain menu screen without storing set-tings.

– press again button MODE for long togo back to the standard screen or to themain menu according to the current menulevel.

Selecting the language (Language)

Display messages can be shown in differ-ent languages: Italian, French, Spanish, Por-tuguese, German, English.

To set the required language proceed asfollows:

– briefly press button MODE: the previ-ously set “language” will flash on the dis-play;



Setting the buzzer volume (Buzzer volume)

With this function the volume of thebuzzer accompanying any failure/warningindication can be adjusted according to 8levels.

To set the required the volume proceedas follows:

– briefly press button MODE: the previ-ously set volume “level” will flash on thedisplay;



32

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS Adjusting the button volume

(Button vol.)

With this function the volume of theroger-beep accompanying the activationof buttons MODE, Õ and Ô can be ad-justed according to 8 levels.

To set the required the volume proceedas follows:

– briefly press button MODE: the previ-ously set volume “level” will flash on thedisplay;



S.B.R. buzzer reactivation (Belt buzzer)

This function can be only displayed afterFiat Dealership has deactivated the S.B.R.system (see paragraph “S.B.R. system” insection “Safety devices”).

Scheduled Servicing (Service)

Through this function it is possible to dis-play information connected to proper carservicing.

To display scheduled servicing info pro-ceed as follows:

– briefly press button MODE: service inkm or mi, according to previous setting,will be displayed (see paragraph “Distanceunit”);

– press button Õ or Ô to select display-ing in days;


33

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSNote The “Service Schedule” includes car

maintenance every 30,000 km (or equiv-alent value in miles) or every year; this isshown automatically, with the ignition keyat MAR, starting from 2,000 km (or equiv-alent value in miles) or 30 days from thisdeadline and it is shown again every 200km (or equivalent value in miles) or every3 days. Below 200 km servicing indicationsare displayed more frequently. Servicingindication will be displayed in km or mi ac-cording to previous setting. When a pro-grammed maintenance interval (coupon)is near to come, turning the ignition keyto MAR, the display will show the mes-sage “Service” followed by the number ofkm/mi or days to go before car servicing.“Scheduled servicing” message is displayedin km/mi or days according to the ap-proaching service interval. Contact a FiatDealership to carry out any service op-eration provided by the “Service sched-ule” or “Annual inspection plan”, and toreset the display.

Exit Menu

This is the last function that closes the cir-cular setting cycle listed in the initial menuscreen.

Briefly press button MODE to go back tothe standard screen without storing set-tings.

Press button Ô to return to the first menuoption (Speed Beep).

Instrument panel, display andbutton lighting adjustment (Light rheostat)

With this function it is possible to adjustthe lighting (dimming/brightening) of theinstrument panel, sound system display,Connect/Navigator display, two-zone cli-mate control display and steering wheelcontrols.

Press buttons Õ/Ô fig. 23 for light ad-justment to carry out required light ad-justment.

Return to standard screen is automatic orby pressing briefly button MODE.

fig. 23 F0C0259m

34

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS TRIP COMPUTER

GENERAL

The “Trip computer” displays information(with ignition key at MAR), relating to theoperating status of the car.

This function comprises the “General trip”concerning the “complete mission” of thecar (journey) and “Trip B”, concerning thepartial mission of the car; this latter func-tion is “contained” (as shown in fig. 25)within the complete mission. Both func-tions are resettable (reset - start of newmission).

“General Trip” displays the figures relat-ing to:

– Range

– Trip distance

– Average consumption

– Instant consumption

– Average speed

– Trip time (driving time).

“Trip B” displays the figures relating to:

– Trip distance B

– Average consumption B

– Average speed B

– Trip time B (driving time).

Note “Trip B” function can be excluded(see paragraph “Trip B On/Off”). “Range”and “Instant consumption” cannot be re-set.

Values displayed

Range

This value shows the distance in km (ormi) that the car can still cover beforeneeding fuel, assuming that driving condi-tions are kept unvaried. The display willshow “----” if the range value is below 50km (or 30 mi).

Trip distance

This value shows the distance coveredfrom the start of the new mission.

Average consumption

This value shows the average consump-tion from the start of the new mission.

Instant consumption

This value shows instant fuel consumption(this value is updated second by second). Ifparking the car with engine on, the displaywill show “----”.

Average speed

This value shows the car average speed asa function of the overall time elapsed sincethe start of the new mission.

35

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

fig. 24 F0C0023m

Trip time

This value shows the time elapsed sincethe start of the new mission.

IMPORTANT Lacking information, Tripcomputer values are displayed with “----”.When normal operating condition is re-set, calculation of different units willrestart regularly. Values displayed beforethe failure will not be reset.

TRIP button fig. 24

The TRIP button, set on right steering col-umn stalk, shall be used (with ignition keyat MAR), to display and to reset the pre-viously described values to start a newmission:

– short push to display the different val-ues;

– long push to reset and then start a newmission.

New mission

New mission starts after:

– “manual” resetting by the user, by press-ing the relevant button;

– “automatic” resetting, when the “tripdistance” reaches 4999,9 km or when the“trip time” reaches 99.59 (99 hours and59 minutes);

– after disconnecting/reconnecting thebattery.

36

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS IMPORTANT The reset operation in the

presence of the screens concerning the“General Trip” makes it possible to resetalso the “Trip B”. The reset operation inthe presence of the screens concerningonly the “Trip B” makes it possible to re-set only the information associated withthis function.

Start of journey procedure

With ignition key at MAR, press and keepTRIP button pressed for over 2 secondsto reset.

Reset TRIP BEnd of partial mission

Start of new partial missionEnd of partial mission

Start of new partial mission

Reset TRIP BEnd of partial mission

Start of new partial mission

Reset GENERAL TRIPEnd of complete mission

Start of new mission

Reset GENERAL TRIPEnd of complete mission

Start of new mission

End of partial mission Start of new

partial mission

Reset TRIP B

Reset TRIP B

TRIP B

TRIP B

TRIP B

GENERAL TRIP

˙

˙

˙

˙

˙

˙

˙

˙

fig. 25

37

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

fig. 26 F0C0158m

Fabric upholstery of your caris purpose-made to withstandcommon wear resulting fromnormal use of the car. It is

however absolutely necessary to pre-vent hard and/or prolonged scratch-ing/scraping caused by clothing acces-sories like metallic buckles, studs, “Vel-cro” fixings, etc. that stressing locallythe fabric could break yarns and dam-age the upholstery as a consequence.

Only make adjustments whenthe car is stationary.

Once you have released thelever, check that the seat isfirmly locked in the runners bytrying to move it back and

forth. Failure to lock the seat in placecould result in the seat moving sud-denly and the driver losing control ofthe car.

Tilting the back rest (3-door versions)

To gain access to the rear seats, pull thehandle E upwards, the back rest folds andthe seat is free to run forwards. When re-setting the back rest, the seat returns toits original position (mechanical memory).

SEATS

FRONT SEATS fig. 26

Moving the seat backwards or forwards

Lift the lever A (on the internal side of theseat) and push the seat forwards or back-wards: in driving position the arms shouldrest on the rim of the steering wheel.

Seat height adjustment (where provided)

Move the lever B upwards or downwardsto achieve the required height.

IMPORTANT Adjustment must be car-ried out only seated in the driver’s seat.

Back rest angle adjustment

Turn the knob C.

Lumbar adjustment (where provided)

To adjust, turn the knob D.

38

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

Seat warming (where provided) fig. 27

With ignition key at MAR, press buttonC to switch the seat warming on/off. Theled on the button will light up when thefunction is on.

Front passenger’s seat “table” tilting (where provided)

To tilt the seat, use lever A-fig. 28 andfold the back rest at the same time.

To reset it to normal position, lift the backrest in the direction opposed to the ar-row until hearing the coupling click.

EASY ENTRY (3-door versions)

This function, operating regardless of theignition key position, facilitates access torear seats.

To access the rear seats lift handle A-fig.29 and move the seat back forwards B:the seat automatically slides forward.

fig. 27 F0C305m

fig. 28 F0C0415m fig. 29 F0C0404m

39

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSWhen the front seat back is returned to

its normal position, the seat returns to itsoriginal position.

If, when returning to the original position,it finds an obstacle (e.g.: rear passenger’sknees) it stops; then moves forwards offew centimetres and then it locks.

REAR SLIDING SEATS (where provided)

Back rest angle adjustment

Lift handle A-fig. 30 and guide the backrest adjusting it in one of the six availablepositions.

Moving the seat backwards or forwards

Lift lever B taking it in the middle andmove the seat backwards or forwards; thetwo sides can be adjusted individually.

fig. 30 F0C0338m



40

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

The space obtained between the rear seatback and the baggage compartment can becovered with proper boot covers B-fig. 31 (left-hand side) and D (right-handside).

To do this, take tongues A-fig. 31and Cand leading them delicately, hook coversB-fig. 31 and D to the relevant fixings E-fig. 32 located on the back of the rear seatbacks.

fig. 31 F0C0314m fig. 32 F0C0315m fig. 33 F0C0312m

Only make adjustmentswhen the car is stationary.

WARNING

Once you have released thelever, check that the seat is

firmly locked in the runners by tryingto move it back and forth. Failure tolock the seat in place could result inthe seat moving suddenly and the dri-ver losing control of the car.

WARNING

For maximum safety, keepthe back of your seat up-

right, lean back into it and make surethe seat belt fits closely across yourchest and hips.

WARNING

To guarantee proper seat belt fasteningwhen travelling, the seat back shall be ad-justed in 4th position fig. 33

41

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSHEAD RESTRAINTS

FRONT

Head restraints are adjustable in heightand they lock automatically in the requiredposition.

❒ to raise: raise the head restraint untilhearing the locking click.

❒ to lower: press button A-fig. 34 andlower the head restraint.

REAR

Rear seats are fitted with three head re-straints.

To lift out head restraint: take it com-pletely out from the seat back (position ofuse) until hearing a click.

To bring it back to the original position(non-use position): press button A-fig. 35 and lower the head restraint downinto its seat.

IMPORTANT Rear seat passengers shallalways set the head restraints in the po-sition of use.

fig. 34 F0C0123m

Remember that the head re-straints should be adjusted

to support the back of your head andnot your neck. Only in this positiondo they exert their protective action.

WARNING

To optimise head restraintprotective action, adjust the

seat back upright and keep your headas close as possible to the head re-straint.

WARNING

fig. 35 F0C0095m

42

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS STEERING WHEEL

The driver can adjust the steering wheelposition both axially and in height.

Release the lever A-fig. 36 pulling it to-wards the steering wheel, then adjust it inthe most suitable position and lock it push-ing the lever A fully forwards.

fig. 36 F0C0033m



WARNING

Any adjustment of the steer-ing wheel position must be

carried out only with the car station-ary and the engine turned off.

WARNING

43

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSREARVIEW MIRRORS

DRIVING MIRROR

The mirror is fitted with a safety devicethat causes it to be released in the eventof a violent crash.

It can be moved using the lever A-fig. 37to two different positions: normal orantiglare.

DOOR MIRRORS

Manual adjustment

When required (for example when themirror causes difficulty in narrow spaces)it is possible to fold the mirror moving itfrom position A-fig. 38 to position B.

fig. 37 F0C0040m

fig. 38 F0C00144m

When driving the mirrors shallalways be in position A-fig. 38.

As the driver’s door mirror iscurved, it may slightly alter theperception of distance.

Electrical adjustment

Proceed as follows:

❒ use switch A-fig. 39 to select the mir-ror required (left or right);

❒ to adjust the mirror move the joystickB in the four directions.

fig. 39 F0C0529m

44

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS HEATING/CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

1. Upper fixed vent for defrosting or demisting windscreen - 2. Centre adjustable vent -3. Fixed vents for defrosting or demistingside windows - 4. Side adjustable and swivel vents - 5. Lower vents - 6. Rear adjustable and swivel outlet - 7. Rear feet area fixedvents.

fig. 40

F0C0002m

45

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

SIDE SWIVEL OUTLETS ANDVENTS fig. 41

A - Fixed vent for side windows.

B - Air flow adjusting control:

ç = completely closed

O = completely open.

C - Control for directing air flow(up/down, right/left).

CENTRAL VENTS fig. 42

A - Controls for directing air flow(up/down, right/left).

B - Air flow adjusting controls:



REAR VENT fig. 43 (where provided)

A - Controls for directing air flow(up/down, right/left).

B - Air flow adjusting control:



Certain versions feature an oddment com-partment instead of the rear vent.


46

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS HEATING AND

VENTILATION

CONTROLS

A: Air temperature knob (mixing hot andcold air)

B: Heated rear window on/off button

C: Fan knob

D: Air recirculation on/off button

E: Air distribution knob.

WARMING THE PASSENGERCOMPARTMENT

Proceed as follows:

❒ knob pointer A in the red section;

❒ knob pointer C on required speed;

❒ turn the knob E to:

≤to warm the feet and at the sametime demist the windscreen

μ to warm the feet and keep the facecool (“bilevel” function)

w to warm the feet of the passengersin the front and rear seats

❒ air recirculation off (button led Toff).

F0C0380mfig. 44

47

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSFRONT WINDOW

FAST DEMISTING/DEFROSTING

Proceed as follows:

❒ rotate completely (pointer on -)knob A to the right;

❒ turn knob C to -;

❒ turn knob E to -;


After demisting/defrosting use commoncontrols to maintain the optimum condi-tions of visibility and comfort.

Window demisting

In the event of considerable outside mois-ture and/or rain and/or considerable dif-ferences in temperature inside and out-side the passenger compartment, performthe following preventive demisting proce-dure:

❒ air recirculation off (button led Toff);

❒ turn knob A to red section;

❒ turn knob C to 2nd speed;

❒ turn knob E to - or to ≤ if the win-dows do not demist.

HEATED REAR WINDOW AND DOOR MIRRORDEMISTING/DEFROSTING

Pressing button ( turns on this functionwhich is shown by the turning on of theled on the button (.

This function is timed and switches off au-tomatically after 20 minutes. To cut outthis function press again button (.

IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers onthe inside of the rear window over theheating filaments to avoid damage thatmight cause it to stop working properly.

FAN SPEED ADJUSTMENT

To ventilate the passenger’s compartmentproperly, proceed as follows:

❒ Central and side vents: completelyopen;

❒ Knob pointer A on blue section;


❒ Knob pointer E to ¥;


RECIRCULATION

Pressing button T turns on this func-tion which is shown by the turning on ofthe led on the button. This function is par-ticularly useful when the outside air isheavily polluted (in a traffic jam, tunnel,etc.). However, it is better not to use itfor long periods, especially if there are sev-eral people in the car.

IMPORTANT The inside air recirculationsystem makes it possible to reach the re-quired “heating” or “cooling” conditionsfaster. Do not use the air recirculationfunction on rainy/cold days as it wouldconsiderably increase the possibility of thewindows misting inside.

48

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS MANUAL CLIMATE

CONTROL SYSTEM(where provided)

CONTROLS

A: Air temperature knob (mixing hot andcold air)

B: Heated rear window on/off button

C: Fan knob

D: Compressor on/off switch

E: Air recirculation on/off button

F: Air distribution knob.

WARMING THE PASSENGERCOMPARTMENT

Proceed as follows:

❒ knob pointer A in the red section;


❒ turn knob F to:

≤to warm the feet and at the same timedemist the windscreen

μto warm the feet and keep the face cool(“bilevel” function)

w to warm the feet of the front and rearpassengers.


F0C0372mfig. 45

49

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSFRONT WINDOW

FAST DEMISTING/DEFROSTING

Proceed as follows:

❒ press button ❄;

❒ rotate completely (pointer on -)knob A to the right;

❒ turn knob C to -;

❒ turn knob F to -;


After demisting/defrosting use commoncontrols to maintain the optimum condi-tions of visibility and comfort.

Window demisting

In the event of considerable outside mois-ture and/or rain and/or considerable dif-ferences in temperature inside and out-side the passenger compartment, performthe following preventive demisting proce-dure:

❒ press button ❄;

❒ air recirculation off (button led Toff);

❒ turn knob A to red section;

❒ turn knob C to 2nd speed;

❒ turn knob F to - or to ≤ if the win-dows do not demist.

Climate control system is very useful tospeed up demisting since it dehumidifiesthe air. Set controls to demisting functionand switch on the climate control systemby pressing button ❄.


Pressing button ( turns on this functionwhich is shown by the turning on of theled on the button (.

This function is timed and switches off au-tomatically after 20 minutes. To cut outthis function press again button (.

IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers onthe inside of the rear window over theheating filaments to avoid damage thatmight cause it to stop working properly.

FAN SPEED ADJUSTMENT

To ventilate the passenger’s compartmentproperly, proceed as follows:

❒ Central and side vents: completelyopen;



❒ Knob pointer F to ¥;


50

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS AIR RECIRCULATION

Pressing button T turns on this func-tion which is shown by the turning on ofthe led on the button.

This function is particularly useful whenthe outside air is heavily polluted (in a traf-fic jam, tunnel, etc.) However, it is betternot to use it for long periods, especiallyif there are several people in the car.

IMPORTANT The inside air recirculationsystem makes it possible to reach the re-quired “heating” or “cooling” conditionsfaster. Do not use the air recirculationfunction on rainy/cold days as it wouldconsiderably increase the possibility of thewindows misting inside.

CLIMATE CONTROL (cooling)

Proceed as follows:



❒ Knob pointer F to ¥;

❒ Press buttons ❄ and T (button ledson).

Cooling adjustment

Proceed as follows:

❒ Turn off button T (button led off);

❒ Turn knob A to the right to raise tem-perature;

❒ Turn knob C to the left to reduce thefan speed.

LOOKING AFTER THE SYSTEM

During winter, the climate control systemmust be turned on at least once a monthfor about 10 minutes. Before summer,have the system checked at a Fiat Deal-ership.

51

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

F0C0381mfig. 46

AUTOMATIC TWO-ZONE CLIMATECONTROL SYSTEM(where provided)

Description

The car is fitted with a two-zone climatecontrol system which makes it possible toseparately adjust the air temperature onthe driver’s side and on the passenger’sside.

The system is fitted with the AQS func-tion (Air Quality System) that turns on in-side air recirculation automatically whenit detects the presence of outside pollut-ed air (for example when driving in thecity, queues and tunnels).

CONTROLS

A: Button for selecting the system auto-matic mode (AUTO) and knob to ad-just temperature on driver side

B: Air distribution selection button

C: Display showing climate control sys-tem data

D: Knob for adjusting fan speed

E: Button for aligning the temperatureset on the passenger’s side with thaton the driver’s side (MONO) andknob to adjust temperature on pas-senger side

F: Two-zone climate control on/off but-ton

G: Rear window heating on/off button

H: MAX-DEF function button (front win-dow fast defrosting/demisting)

I: Passenger compartment temperaturesensor

L: Inside air recirculation and AQS func-tion on/off button

M: Climate control compressor on/offbutton

52

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS SWITCHING THE CLIMATE

CONTROL SYSTEM ON

The system can be started in differentways, but it is advisable to set the tem-peratures required on the display; thenpress button AUTO.

It is possible to personalise required tem-peratures (driver and passenger) with amaximum difference of 7°C.

The climate control system compressorworks only with the engine running andoutside temperature above 4°C.

It is possible to personalise the choicesmade automatically by the system inter-vening manually on the following controls:

❒ fan speed adjustment knob;

❒ air distribution selection button;

❒ inside air recirculation and AQS func-tion on/off button;

❒ climate control compressor button.

It is inadvisable to use the in-side air recirculation feature

with low outside temperature as thewindows might mist over quickly.

WARNING

HOW TO USE THE AUTOMATICFUNCTION (AUTO)

Press button AUTO; the system will au-tomatically adjust:

❒ air inlet in the passenger’s compart-ment;

❒ air distribution in the passenger’s com-partment;

thus cancelling all the previous manual ad-justments.

When the climate control system is work-ing automatically, FULL AUTO is dis-played.

53

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSFAN SPEED ADJUSTMENT

To adjust the fan speed, press button p.

The 12 selectable speeds are shown by thelighting up of the bars on the climate con-trol system display:

❒ max fan speed = all bars lit

❒ min fan speed = one bar lit.

The fan can be cut off (all bars off) only ifthe climate control compressor has beenswitched off pressing button ❄.

To restore automatic fan speed control,after a manual adjustment, press buttonAUTO.

FAST FRONT WINDOW DEMISTING/DEFROSTING (MAX-DEF function)

Pressing button - the climate controlautomatically activates timed operation ofall the functions required to quickendemisting/defrosting of the windscreenand front side windows.

Functions are:

❒ switches on climate control compres-sor (if outside temperature exceeds4°C);

❒ switches off inside air recirculation, ifon (button led T off);

❒ switches on heated rear window (but-ton led - on) and door mirror coils;

❒ sets max air temperature;

❒ activates proper air flow.


Pressing button ( activates this function.When this function is on, the button ledis on.

This function is timed.

IMPORTANT Press button T to ob-tain outside air inlet into passenger com-partment.

54

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS AQS (Air Quality System) function activation

The AQS function, (message AQS on thedisplay), turns on air recirculation auto-matically when it detects the presence ofoutside polluted air (for example whendriving in the city, queues and tunnels).

IMPORTANT When the AQS function isactive, after 15 minutes of consecutive in-ternal air recirculation, the climate con-trol system enables outside air inlet (re-gardless of air pollution level) for approx.1 minute to change air inside the passen-ger compartment.

INSIDE AIR RECIRCULATIONON/OFF AND AQS FUNCTION(Air Quality System)

Press button T.

Inside air recirculation is controlled bythree operating logics:

❒ automatic control, indicated by messageAQS on the display and button ledT off;

❒ forced switching off (inside air recircu-lation always off with air inlet from out-side), button led T off;

❒ forced switching on (inside air recircu-lation always on with air inlet from out-side), button led T on.

Pressing button OFF, the climate controlsystem turns on automatically the insideair recirculation function (button ledT on). In these conditions it is how-ever possible to take air from the outside(and vice versa) pressing button T(button led off).

With button OFF pressed (button led on),the AQS (Air Quality System) functioncannot be activated.

IMPORTANT The inside air recirculationsystem makes it possible to reach the re-quired “heating” or “cooling” conditionsfaster. It is however inadvisable to use iton rainy/cold days as it would consider-ably increase the possibility of the win-dows misting inside, especially if the cli-mate control system is off. It is advisableto turn on the inside air recirculation sys-tem in queues or tunnels to avoid admit-ting polluted air from outside. The pro-longed use of this function should how-ever be avoided, especially with severalpersons on board, to avoid the possibili-ty of the windows misting inside.

55

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSALIGNMENT OF SET

TEMPERATURES (MONO function)

Pressing button MONO automaticallyaligns the temperature on the passenger’sside with that on the driver’s side.

Turn the knob AUTO or MONO toraise/reduce the temperature between thetwo zones by the same value.

Press again button MONO to disable thefunction.

CLIMATE CONTROLCOMPRESSOR ON/OFF

Press button ❄ to switch on the climatecontrol compressor.

Compressor on

❒ button led ❄ on;

❒ symbol ❄ on the display, lit.

Compressor off

❒ button led ❄ off;

❒ symbol ❄ on the display, off;

❒ inside air recirculation off;

❒ AQS function disabled.

With the climate control compressor off,it is not possible to admit air to the pas-senger compartment with a temperaturebelow the outside temperature; in thiscase symbol ò flashes on the display.

The switching off of the climate controlcompressor remains in storage even whenthe engine has been stopped. To restoreautomatic control for switching on the cli-mate control compressor, press button ❄or AUTO, in which case, the other man-ual settings set will be cancelled.

AIR DISTRIBUTION SELECTION

Pressing one or more buttons Q/E/Zit is possible to choose manually 7 of thepossible air distributions to the passengercompartment:

Q Air flow to the windscreen andfront side window vents to demistor defrost them.

Z Air flow towards the front andrear lower parts of the passengercompartment. This type of distri-bution allows heating of the pas-senger compartment in the short-est time.

QZE Splitting of the air flow between

front and rear vents, centre andside dashboard outlets, rear out-let, windscreen and front side win-dow demisting vents.

E Air flow to the dashboard centreand side outlets (passenger’sbody).

56

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS Q Splitting of the air flow between

Z feet vents and windscreen andfront side window demisting/de-frosting vents. This type of airdistribution allows satisfactoryheating of the passenger com-partment while preventing pos-sible misting of the windows.

ZE Splitting of the air flow between

feet vents (warmest air) and thedashboard centre and side outletsand the rear outlet (coolest air).

EQ

Splitting of the air flow betweencentre and side dashboard outlets,rear outlet and windscreen andside window demisting/defrostingvents. This type of air distributionallows satisfactory ventilation ofthe passenger compartment whilepreventing possible misting of thewindows.

IMPORTANT For operation of the cli-mate control system, at least one of but-tons Q/E/Z shall be activated. Deacti-vation of all buttons Q/E/Z is thereforenot enabled by the system.

IMPORTANT To switch the system onagain, press button OFF; this operation re-sets all operating conditions stored beforeswitching off.

To restore automatic air distribution con-trol after a manual selection, press buttonAUTO.

SWITCHING THE CLIMATECONTROL SYSTEM OFF

Press button OFF.

The following information is displayed:

❒ writing OFF;

❒ outside temperature;

❒ inside air recirculation on (button ledT on).

57

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSEXTERNAL LIGHTS

The left-hand stalk controls the externallights and the direction indicators.

The external lights can only be switchedon when the ignition key is at MAR.

LIGHTS SWITCHED OFF fig. 47

Knurled ring turned to O.

SIDELIGHTS fig. 47

Turn the knurled ring to 6.

The warning light 3 on the instrumentpanel will turn on.

DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS fig. 47

Turn the knurled ring to 2.


MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS fig. 47

When the knurled ring is at 2 push thelever towards the dashboard (stable posi-tion).


Pulling the lever towards the steeringwheel again, the main beams are turnedoff and the dipped beams on.

FLASHING THE HEADLIGHTSfig. 47

Pull the lever towards the steering wheel(unstable position) regardless of the po-sition of the knurled ring.


fig. 47 F0C0042m fig. 48 F0C0046m

DIRECTION INDICATORS fig. 48

Push the lever to (stable) position:

❒ up (position 1): right-hand direction in-dicator on

❒ down (position 2): left-hand directionindicator on

Warning light Î or ¥ will come on flash-ing on the instrument cluster at the sametime.

58

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS Direction indicators are switched off au-

tomatically when the steering wheel isstraightened.

If you want the indicator to flash briefly toshow that you are about to change lane,move the stalk up or down without click-ing into position (unstable position). Whenreleased the stalk will return to its homeposition.

“FOLLOW ME HOME” DEVICE fig. 49

This function allows the illumination of thespace in front of the car for a preset pe-riod of time.

Activation

With the ignition key at STOP or re-moved, pull the stalk towards the steeringwheel and operate it within 2 minutesfrom when the engine is turned off.

At each single movement of the stalk, thestaying on of the lights is extended by 30seconds up to a maximum of 2.5 minutes,then the lights are switched off automati-cally.

Each time the lever is operated, the warn-ing light 3 turns on together with themessage on the display (see “Warninglights and messages” section).

Deactivation

Keep the stalk pulled towards the steer-ing wheel for more than 2 seconds.

fig. 49 F0C0045m

59

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTSSENSOR (daylight sensor) fig. 50(where provided)

It detects the changes of the external lightintensity of the car according to the lightsensitivity set: greater is the sensitivity,smaller is the amount of external light nec-essary to control the switching-on of theexterior headlights. The daylight sensorsensitivity can be adjusted with the “Set-up menu” on the display.

Activation

Turn the knurled ring to 2A : in this way,the automatic activation of the side/tail-lights and dipped beam headlights are si-multaneously enabled according to the ex-ternal luminosity.

During the sensor operation lights can on-ly be made flashing.

Deactivation

As a result of the sensor control, the mainbeam headlights will switch off and, afteraround 10 seconds, sidelights will switchoff too.

The light sensor is not able to detect thefog presence, lights shall therefore beswitched on manually.

fig. 50 F0C0153m

60

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS WINDOW WASHING

WINDSCREEN WASHER/WIPER fig. 51

The device can only work when the igni-tion key is at MAR.

The right stalk can be moved to five dif-ferent positions:

A: windscreen wiper off.

B: flick wipe.

With the stalk in position B, turning theknurled ring F four possible intermittentspeeds are obtained:

, = very slow intermittent

■ = slow intermittent.

■■ = intermittent medium.

■■■ = fast intermittent.

C: continuous slow;

D: continuous fast;

E: fast temporary (unstable position).

Operation in position E is limited to thetime the lever is held in this position.When the lever is released, it returns toposition A automatically stopping thewiper.

IMPORTANT When the wiper is on, en-gaging reverse gear automatically turns onthe rear window wiper.

fig. 51 F0C0048m

Never use the window wiperto remove ice or snow fromthe windscreen. In these con-ditions, the wiper is submitted

to excessive effort that results in mo-tor protection cutting in and wiper op-eration inhibition for few seconds as aconsequence. If operation is not re-stored contact Fiat Dealership.

61

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

“Smart washing” function fig. 52

Pulling the stalk towards the steeringwheel (unstable position) operates thewindscreen washer.

Keeping the stalk pulled, with just onemovement it is possible to operate thewasher jet and the wiper at the same time;indeed, the latter comes into action au-tomatically if the stalk is pulled for morethan half a second.

The wiper stops working a few strokes af-ter releasing the stalk; a further “cleaningstroke”, after a few seconds, completesthe wiping operation.

RAIN SENSOR (where provided)

The rain sensor A-fig. 53 is behind thedriving mirror in contact with the wind-screen and has the purpose of automati-cally adjust, during the intermittent oper-ation, the frequency of the windscreenwiper strokes as to the rain intensity.

The sensor has a range of adjustment thatgradually varies between wiper stationary(no wiping) when the windscreen is dry,to wiper at first continuous speed (con-tinuous slow) with heavy rain.

Activation

Move the right-hand stalk downwards byone position.

The activation of the rain sensor is sig-nalled by a control acquisition “stroke”.

IMPORTANT Keep clean the glass in thesensor area.

Turning the knurled ring F-fig. 51 it ispossible to increase the sensitivity of therain sensor, obtaining a quicker changefrom stationary (no wiping) when thewindscreen is dry, to first continuousspeed (continuous slow).

The increase of the sensitivity of the rainsensor is signalled by a control and acqui-sition “stroke”.

Operating the windscreen washer withthe rain sensor activated the normal wash-ing cycle is performed at the end of whichthe rain sensor resumes its normal auto-matic function.

fig. 52 F0C0049m fig. 53 F0C0053m

62

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS Deactivation

Turn the ignition key to STOP.

To the following starting operation (keyat MAR), the sensor will not be reacti-vated even is the stalk is on B-fig. 51. In this event, to activate the rainsensor, you have to move the stalk to Aor C and then again to B.

When the rain sensor is again activatedin this way, at least one windscreen wiperstroke occurs, even if the windscreen isdry.

Do not activate the rain sen-sor when washing the car inan automatic washing station.

In the event of ice on thewindscreen, make sure to havedisconnected the device.

Make sure to have discon-nected the device when

cleaning the windscreen.

WARNING

The rain sensor is able to recognize andautomatically adjust itself in the presenceof the following particular conditions:

❒ impurities on the controlled surface(salt, dirt, etc.);

❒ streaks of water caused by worn wiperblades;

❒ difference between day and night.

63

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

REAR WINDOW WASHER/WIPER fig. 54

The device can only work when the igni-tion key is at MAR.

Pushing the stalk towards the dashboard(unstable position), the rear windowwasher jet and the continuous rear win-dow wiper operation are activated.

Operation ends when the stalk is released.

Turning the knurled ring A from O to 'the rear window wiper with intermittentoperation is activated.

fig. 54 F0C0047m

HEADLIGHT WASHER fig. 55

Fiat Stilo headlight washers are “re-tractable”, i.e.: they are located inside thefront bumpers and they are activated (withdipped beam headlights and/or main beamheadlights on) when the windscreen wash-er is operated.

IMPORTANT Check at regular intervalscorrect operation and cleanness of noz-zles.

fig. 55 F0C0270m

Never use the rear windowwiper to remove ice or snowfrom the rear window. In theseconditions, the wiper is sub-

mitted to excessive effort that resultsin motor protection cutting in andwiper operation inhibition for few sec-onds as a consequence. If operation isnot restored contact Fiat Dealership.

64

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

DEVICE ENGAGEMENT

Turn knurled ring A-fig. 56 to ON.

The device may only be engaged in the 4th

or 5th gear. Travelling downhill with thedevice engaged, the car speed may in-crease more than the memorised one.

When the device is activated, the warninglight Ü on the instrument panel turns ontogether with the message on the display(see section “Warning lights and mes-sages”).

TO MEMORISE SPEED

Proceed as follows:

❒ turn the knurled ring A-fig. 56 to ONand press the accelerator pedal to therequired speed;

❒ turn the knurled ring B to (+) for atleast three seconds, then release it. Thecar speed is memorised and it is there-fore possible to release the acceleratorpedal.

In the case of need (when overtaking forinstance) acceleration is possible simplypressing the accelerator pedal: releasingthe accelerator pedal, the car will returnto the speed memorised previously.

fig. 56 F0C0127m

CRUISE CONTROL(constant speedregulator)(where provided)

It is a device able to support the driver,with electronic control, which allows dri-ving at speed over 30 km/h on long andstraight dry roads (e.g.: motorways), at adesired speed, without pressing the ac-celerator pedal. Therefore it is not sug-gested to use this device on extra-urbanroads with traffic. Do not use it in town.

65

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSTO RESET THE MEMORISED

SPEED

If the device has been disengaged for ex-ample pressing the brake or clutch pedal,the memorised speed can be reset as fol-lows:

❒ accelerate gradually until reaching aspeed approaching the one memorised;

❒ engage the gear selected at the time ofspeed memorising (4th or 5th gear);

❒ press button C-fig. 56.

TO REDUCE MEMORISED SPEED

The speed memorised can be increased intwo ways:

❒ disengaging the device and then mem-orising the new speed;

or

❒ keeping the knurled ring B-fig. 56 to(–) until reaching the new speed whichwill be memorised automatically.

Each turn of the knurled ring will corre-spond to a slight reduction in speed (about1 km/h), while keeping the knurled ringturned will correspond to a continuousspeed reduction.

TO INCREASE THE MEMORISEDSPEED

The speed memorised can be increased intwo ways:

❒ pressing the accelerator and then mem-orising the new speed reached;

or

❒ turning the knurled ring B-fig. 56 tem-porarily to (+).

Each turn of the knurled ring will corre-spond to a slight increase in speed (about1 km/h), while keeping the knurled ringturned will correspond to a continuousspeed increase.

66

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS DEVICE DISENGAGEMENT

Turn the knurled ring A-fig. 56 to OFFor the ignition key to STOP. The deviceis automatically deactivated also in one ofthe following cases:

❒ pressing the brake or clutch pedal;

❒ ASR or ESP cut-in (where provided);

❒ gearshifting in versions with Selespeedautomatic transmission (where provid-ed);

❒ involuntarily moving the Selespeedlever (where provided) toN.

When travelling with the de-vice on, never set the

gearshift lever to neutral and do notmove the Selespeed lever to N.

WARNINGIn the event of device mal-function or failure, turn the

knurled ring A-fig. 56 to OFF andcontact a Fiat Dealership after check-ing the protection fuse integrity.

WARNING

67

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSCEILING LIGHTS

FRONT CEILING LIGHT fig. 57

Courtesy lights

Press button A to turn on/off the driver’scourtesy light or button C to turn on/offthe passenger’s courtesy light.

With the key to STOP or removed, theceiling light will stay on for about 15 min-utes, then it is automatically switched off. Central light

It turns on automatically when opening adoor and it will turn off when closing thedoor, about 10 seconds later.

If the door is left open, the light goes offafter about 3 minutes.

The bulb can also be turned on/off bypressing button B.

Light turning on/off is gradual.

After switching on by button B, if the keyis at STOP or removed, the ceiling lightstays on for about 15 minutes, then it isautomatically switched off.

REAR CEILING LIGHT (where provided) fig. 58

Versions without sunroof

Press button A to turn on/off the left rearlight or button B to turn on/off the rightrear light.

When the front ceiling light is on, also therear ceiling light will come on.

fig. 57 F0C0374m fig. 58 F0C0055m

68

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

Versions with sunroof fig. 59

To turn on/off the bulbs, press the ceil-ing lights A, located on rear doors.

Ceiling lights turn on:

❒ when a door is unlocked, and stay onfor about 10 seconds if no door isopened;

❒ when removing the key from the igni-tion switch, they stay on for about 10seconds and then go off automatically;

❒ when fuel cut-off switch is activated,they stay on for about 15 minutes, andthen go off automatically.

Door locking causes immediate lightswitching off.

CONTROLS

HAZARD LIGHTS fig. 60

They come on when switch A is pressedregardless of the position of the ignitionkey.

When the device is on, the switch flashesand warning lights Î and ¥ on the clustercome on.

Press the switch A again to turn the lightsoff.

FRONT FOG LIGHTS(where provided)

To turn front fog lights on, press buttonA-fig. 61 to activate these lights it is nec-essary to have the side/taillights switchedon.

Press the button again to turn the lightsoff.

fig. 59 F0C0297m fig. 60 F0C0081m

fig. 61 F0C0137m

The use of hazard lights isgoverned by the Highway

Code of the country you are in. Keepto the rules.

WARNING

69

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSPARKING LIGHTS

These lights can only be turned on with ig-nition key at STOP or removed, bypressing button B-fig. 61 for about 1 sec-ond.

Press the button again to turn the light off.

REAR FOG LIGHTS

To turn rear fog lights on, press button C-fig. 61, to activate these lights it is nec-essary to have the dipped beams or frontfog lights switched on.

Press the button again to turn the lightsoff.

Carefully inspect the car to find fuel leaks,e.g. in the engine compartment, under thecar or near the tank.

If no fuel leaks are found and the car canbe started again, press button A to resetthe fuel system and the lights.

After a crash, remember to turn the igni-tion key to STOP to prevent battery run-down.

FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH fig. 62

It is located next to the passenger’s doorpost, at the bottom, and comes into op-eration in the case of a crash:

❒ cutting off fuel and switching off the en-gine;

❒ automatically unlocking the doors;

❒ switching on interior lights (for about15 minutes).

When the device comes into operation,the instrument panel warning light ècomes on together with the message onthe display (see section “Warning lightsand messages”).

fig. 62 F0C0062m

If, after a crash, you smell fu-el or see leaks from the fuel

system, do not reset the switch toavoid fine risk.

WARNING

70

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS INTERIOR FITTINGS

FRONT ARMREST (where provided)

The armrest can be adjusted up and down.

To adjust, lift the armrest slightly and pullthe release device B-fig. 63.

An oddment compartment can be foundin the front armrest. Press button A to liftthe cover.

IMPORTANT Raise the armrest com-pletely to prevent interfering with thehandbrake lever when operating it. Whenthe armrest is fully raised, take care notto press button A accidentally to avoidopening the oddment compartment cov-er and the falling of the objects containedas a consequence.

REAR ARMREST (where provided)

To use the rear armrest A-fig. 64, low-er it as shown in the figure.

The armrest houses two compartmentsB-fig. 65 for glass and/or can holder. Touse them pull the tab C in the arrow di-rection.

Inside the armrest, after lifting the cover,there is an oddment compartment.

fig. 63 F0C0070m

fig. 64 F0C0073m

fig. 65 F0C0339m

71

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

ODDMENT COMPARTMENTS

Upper oddment compartment onpassenger’s side

Open the oddment compartment A-fig. 66 as shown by the arrow.

The oddment compartment can be heat-ed/cooled by an air vent B-fig. 67 con-nected to the climate control system.

To open the vent operate lever B in thearrow direction.

If the two-zone climate control system isfitted, the temperature of this compart-ment will be the same as that on passen-ger side.

Lower oddment compartment onpassenger’s side

Open the oddment compartment movingthe handle C-fig. 68, as shown by the ar-row.

When the oddment compartment isopened, an interior courtesy light comeson. Such light stays on for about 15 min-utes after having turned the key to STOP.

If during this time a door or the boot areopened, the light will come on again forabout 15 minutes.

Oddment compartments under the seats (where provided) fig. 69

On certain versions, under the driver seatis fitted an oddment compartment; do notuse it to put inside objects heavier than1,5 kg.

fig. 66 F0C0058m

fig. 67 F0C0376m

fig. 68 F0C0056m fig. 69 F0C0032m

Never travel with the odd-ment compartments open to

prevent risk of injuries in the event ofa crash.

WARNING

72

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

CURRENT OUTLET (12V)

The current outlet is located on the cen-tral console and it only works with igni-tion key at MAR. If the smokers’ kit is re-quested, the current outlet will be re-placed by the cigar lighter (see next para-graph).

CIGAR LIGHTER (where provided)

It is located on the central console, at theside of the handbrake lever.

Press button A-fig. 70 to switch on thecigar lighter with ignition key at MAR.

After few seconds the button will returnto its initial position and is ready for use.

IMPORTANT Always check that the cig-ar lighter has turned off.

IMPORTANT The cigar lighter gets veryhot. Handle it with care and make surethat it is not used by children: danger offire and/or burns.

ASHTRAY (where provided)

It consists of a spring-release removableplastic container fig. 71, that can be lo-cated in the glass/can holder recesses onthe central console.

IMPORTANT Do not use the ashtray aswaste paper basket: it might set on fire incontact with cigarette stubs.

TILTING SHELF (where provided)

Behind the passenger seatback, it is avail-able (on certain versions) a tilting shelf A-fig. 72.

To position it horizontally, pull it towardsthe direction shown by the arrows; re-verse this operation to reposition it.

IMPORTANT Do not position on the tilt-ing shelf objects heavier than 3 kg: for safe-ty purposes the shelf is released from itshousing when submitted to excessiveloads.


73

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

Resetting the shelf (after releasing)

Proceed as follows:

❒ fit the shelf B-fig. 73 so that the sup-port fixed pin A is fitted inside the shelfleft rail;

❒ turn the shelf B until the lower edgeis touching the support A mobile pin C;

❒ press slightly in arrow direction to setthe shelf B in the position of use. Pin Cis inside the shelf right rail.

GLASS HOLDER

The central console houses two recess-es A-fig. 74 for glasses, cups or cans. ODDMENT COMPARTMENT

fig. 75

It is located in the central console, underthe front armrest.

SUN VISORS fig. 76

They are located at the sides of the dri-ving mirror. They can be adjusted for-wards and sidewards.

fig. 73 F0C0311m

Never travel with the shelftilted. The shelf or the ob-

jects on it can cause injuries in theevent of a crash.

WARNING

fig. 74 F0C0094m fig. 75 F0C0071m

fig. 76 F0C0124m

74

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS On certain versions, th passenger’s sun vi-

sor is fitted, on the back, with a courtesymirror with a light which enables to usethe mirror also with poor sunlight.

Lift the lid A to use the mirror.

When the ignition key is at STOP, thelight stays on for about 15 minutes: if inthis period a door or the tailgate isopened, the light will stay on for another15 minutes.

The passenger’s sun visor also carries thesymbols and the message concerning thecorrect use of the child restraint systemwith passenger’s air bag (for further in-formation see paragraph “Front passen-ger’s Air bag” in section “Safety”).

“SKYWINDOW”(BLADE SUNROOF) (where provided)

This is a roof opening system consisting of5 glass blades. The sunroof is equippedwith a sun curtain electronically con-trolled, which has the function to preventsun radiation.

SUNROOF OPENING

With ignition key at MAR turn knob A-fig. 77 clockwise and select one of the 6opening positions.

Do not open the sunroof ifthere is snow or ice on it: itcould be damaged.

To guarantee proper sunroofoperation, routinely checkthat water drain ducts at sun-roof corners are clean; clean

also gaskets and sliding guides (with acloth soaked with water).

fig. 77 F0C0222m

When leaving the car, the ig-nition key should be re-

moved to prevent the sunroof frombeing operated inadvertently andharming anyone remaining in the car.Improper use of the sunroof can bedangerous. Before and during its op-eration ensure that any passengersare not at risk from the moving roofeither by personal objects gettingcaught in the mechanism or by beinginjured by it directly.

WARNING

75

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

GLASS BLADES OPENING (knob turning clockwise)

With fully closed roof (curtain and blades),control knob A-fig. 77 at “0”, glass bladeopening affects the curtain opening as fol-lows:

❒ First knob click: rotary movement ofthe first blade until reaching position A-fig. 78; the curtain slides lined up to thesecond blade.

❒ Second knob click: complete opening ofthe first blade and movement of theother ones towards the rear part fig.79 together with movement of the suncurtain.

❒ Third knob click: glass blades (2nd, 3rd

and 4th) moving backwards and move-ment of the sun curtain.

❒ Fourth knob click: glass blades (2nd and3rd) moving backwards and movementof the sun curtain.

❒ Fifth knob click: second blade movingbackwards and movement of the suncurtain.

So the Skywindow is completely open.

With closed blades and sun curtainopen

❒ First knob click: rotary movement ofthe first blade until reaching position A,and the sun curtain.

❒ Second knob click: complete opening ofthe first blade and the other bladesmoving backwards.

❒ Third knob click: glass blades (2nd, 3rd

and 4th) moving backwards.

❒ Fourth knob click: glass blades (2nd and3rd) moving backwards.

❒ Fifth knob click: second blade movingbackwards.

So the Skywindow is completely open.

To open the sunroof completely with onesingle operation, turn the knob to the lastclick (fifth).

fig. 78 F0C02236m fig. 79 F0C00233m

76

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

SUNROOF CLOSING

Glass blades closing (knob turningcounterclockwise) fig. 80

With blades and curtain open (knob A-fig. 81 on fifth click), blades closing is notaffecting the curtain.

❒ First knob click: second blade movingforwards.

❒ Second knob click: second blade mov-ing forwards.

❒ Third knob click: second blade movingforwards.

❒ Fourth knob click: second blade mov-ing forwards and first blade rotation un-til reaching the spoiler position.

❒ Fifth knob click: blades closing com-pletely.

To close the sunroof completely with onesingle operation, turn the knob to “0”.

SUN CURTAINOPENING/CLOSING

To open the curtain press button C-fig. 81.

Curtain opening can be stopped as fol-lows:

❒ pressing again the button C;

❒ when reaching the required openingposition, that can be as follows:

– with glass blades fully closed (equal toroof opening from passenger com-partment)

– with glass blades open partially: linedup to the second blade

– with glass blades fully open: lined upto the second blade and covering thefour open blades.

To close the curtain press button B-fig. 81.

Curtain closing depends on glass bladesopening position: the sunshade curtaincannot be closed completely if blades areopen.

Curtain closing can be stopped as follows:

❒ pressing again button B;

❒ when reaching the required openingposition, that can be as follows:

– with glass blades fully closed (equal toroof opening from passenger com-partment);

– with glass blades open partially: linedup to the second blade;

– with glass blades fully open: the cur-tain cannot be closed.

IMPORTANT Turning the ignition key toSTOP after having operated one of but-tons B-fig. 81 or C, the selected opera-tion will be completed.

fig. 80 F0C0532m fig. 81 F0C0222m

77

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSSUNROOF OPENING/CLOSING

With key without remote control (where provided)

Opening: turn the key clockwise in thedoor revolving plug.

Closing: turn the key counterclockwise inthe door revolving plug.

With key with remote control

Opening: prolonged pressing (for morethan 2 seconds) on button Ë.

Closing: prolonged pressing (for morethan 2 seconds) on button Á.

When buttons Á /Ë, are released, theabove functions are cut-off.

When opening, blades and curtain open atthe same time.

When closing, the curtain closes first andthen are closed the blades.

ANTI-CRUSHING SAFETYSYSTEM

The anti-crushing safety system fitted onthe front curtain outline is active along thewhole closing range of the curtain and cutsinto operation when an obstacle (e.g.: fin-ger, hand, etc...) is met. This safety deviceguarantees the reversal for a short sec-tion.

In addition, the anti-crushing safety systemis active on the rear border of the firstblade and on the front outline of the sec-ond blade: in this case it is active on thewhole closing range of the curtain and cutsinto operation when an obstacle (e.g.: fin-ger, hand, etc...) is met. This safety deviceguarantees the reversal for a short sec-tion.

As concerns the first blade it is active onthe whole rotation range and guaranteesthe reversal of the whole stroke.

After anti-crushing system activation, re-setting can be carried out with the fol-lowing 2 procedures:

❒ pushing knob A-fig. 83 upwards (resetpreviously stopped movement);

❒ turning knob A to another position.

INITIALISATION PROCEDURE

Sunroof shall be re-initialised after dis-connecting the battery or if the relevantprotection fuse is blown:

❒ turn knob A-fig. 81 to “0” (fullyclosed);

❒ keep the knob pressed for over 5 sec-onds: the sunroof will close jerkily;

❒ keep the knob pressed and wait forcomplete closing of the sunroof, untilthe sun curtain clicks twice.

Sunroof is now initialised and it shall workregularly. Otherwise, contact Fiat Deal-ership.

IMPORTANT Carry out the initialisationprocedure with the engine running. If stop-ping the initialisation procedure beforeending it, repeat it from the beginning.

78

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS ANTI-CRUSHING SYSTEM

INHIBITION

Ice or other foreign matters in the sun-roof rails could cause anti-crushing re-peated operation. Therefore make surethere is no obstacle.

In this case it is possible to inhibit the an-ti-crushing system by closing the roof(within 5 seconds from system activation),turning knob A-fig. 81 to 0 and keepingit pressed upwards until closing.

IMPORTANT During this operation donot release knob A; if releasing the knoband then pressing it again, it will be nec-essary to carry out the initialisation pro-cedure described in the previous para-graph.

IMPORTANT During this operation theanti-crushing system is cut-out.

EMERGENCY OPERATION

If the electrical control device does notwork, the sunroof can be operated man-ually as follows:

❒ remove the front ceiling light A-fig. 82 pressing on the sides of the plas-tic shape as shown by the arrow;

❒ insert the proper emergency key B-fig. 83 (located inside the ceiling light)into the seat C-fig. 84;

❒ turn the key to open or close (accord-ing to the rotation direction) the glassblades.

Then, carry out the initialisation proce-dure described on previous page.

fig. 82 F0C0253m fig. 83 F0C0400m

fig. 84 F0C0399m

79

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSDOORS

CENTRAL DOOR LOCKINGSYSTEM

From the outside

With the doors closed, fit and turn the keyin one of the front door locks.

From the inside

From inside the car (with doors closed)press the door lock/unlock button A-fig. 85 located on the driver’s door con-trol panel.

When operating the knob of a door, youlock only the interested door. Shouldpower be lacking it is possible toopen/close the doors manually.

IMPORTANT The rear doors cannot beopened from inside when the child lockis engaged.

CHILD LOCK (5-door versions)

To prevent opening the rear doors fromthe inside.

This device fig. 86 can be engaged onlywith doors open:

❒ position 1 - engaged (door locked);

❒ position 2 - disengaged (door can beopened from the passenger’s compart-ment).

The device is engaged even if the doorsare unlocked by the centralised system.

IMPORTANT Always use this devicewhen transporting children.

IMPORTANT After engaging the lock,check by trying to open a rear door withthe internal handle.

fig. 85 F0C0142m fig. 86 F0C0061m

80

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS POWER WINDOWS

Power windows are fitted with anti-crush-ing safety device to detect the presence ofan obstacle in the window closing stroke.If an obstacle is detected, the safety sys-tem will stop window closing and will re-verse window stroke.

IMPORTANT In the event that the anti-crushing function is activated 5 times inonly 1 minute, the system will automati-cally enter the “recovery” mode (self-pro-tection). This conditions is pointed out bythe fact that, in the closing phase, the win-dow goes up in jerks.

So, it is necessary to carry out the sys-tem restore procedure, acting as follows:

❒ open the windows;

or

❒ turn the ignition key to STOP and thento MAR.

If no malfunction is present, the windowreturns to its normal operation automat-ically. In the event of failure make refer-ence to section “Warning lights and mes-sages”.

IMPORTANT With the ignition key toSTOP or removed, the power windowsremain activated for about 2 minutes andare deactivated immediately the momenta door is opened.

CONTROLS

Driver side fig. 87

On the driver’s door panel are set the but-tons for controlling, with ignition key atMAR:

A: front left window opening/closing;window opening or closing in “auto-matic continuous” mode;

B: front right window opening/closing;window opening or closing in “auto-matic continuous” mode;

C: rear power window enabling/disablingcontrols;

D: rear left window opening/closing; “au-tomatic continuous” operation justduring window opening;

E: rear right window opening/closing;“automatic continuous” operation justduring window opening.

fig. 87 F0C0063m

The system conforms to theforthcoming standard

2000/4/EC concerning the safety ofpassengers leaning out of the pas-senger compartment. At the sametime, the upper outer gasket is notequipped with anti-crush protectionin order to guarantee protectionagainst unwanted access from outsidethe car.

WARNING

81

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSPress buttons A or B to open/close the

required window.

Pressing briefly one of the two buttons,the window “jerks” , whereas a prolongedpressing makes the window opening orclosing in “automatic continuous” mode.

When pressing again button A or B thewindow stops in the required position.

BOOT

The boot tailgate (when unlocked) can beopened only from the outside through theelectric opening handle under the shack-le (saloon versions) fig. 88 or behind theshackle (Multi Wagon versions) fig. 89.

If doors are unlocked the boot can beopened at any time.

To open the tailgate use the key (with orwithout remote control).

If the boot is not shut properly the warn-ing light ´ comes on together with themessage on the display (see section“Warning lights and messages”).

IMPORTANT With running car, never op-erate the tailgate shackle.

Improper use of the powerwindows can be dangerous.

Before and during its operation en-sure that any passengers are not atrisk from the moving glass either bypersonal objects getting caught in themechanism or by being injured by itdirectly. Always remove the ignitionkey when getting out of the car toprevent the power windows being op-erated accidentally and constitutinga danger to the passengers in the car.

WARNING

fig. 88 F0C0402m

fig. 89 F0C0365m

82

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

OPENING FROM THE OUTSIDE

With key without remote control (where provided) fig. 90

Unlock the lock (where provided) withthe metal insert in the ignition key.

Tailgate opening is facilitated by side gasshock springs.

Opening the boot tailgate, the interiorboot ceiling light will come on: the bulbwill automatically switch off closing theboot tailgate.

Such light will stay on for about 15 min-utes after turning the key to STOP: if dur-ing this time a door or the boot areopened, the light will come on again forabout 15 minutes.

With key with remote control

Press button R, even when the elec-tronic alarm (where provided) is activat-ed.

The tailgate opening is indicated by dou-ble flashing of direction indicators; closingis indicated by one flashing (only if alarmis on).

When opening the tailgate with the alarmon, it disconnects:

❒ the volumetric protection;

❒ the anti-raising protection;

❒ the tailgate control sensor.

Such control functions are reset whenclosing the tailgate.

TAILGATE EMERGENCYOPENING FROM PASSENGERCOMPARTMENT (Multi Wagon versions only)

In an emergency, the tailgate can be alsoopened from the passenger compartment;proceed as follows:

❒ take the screwdriver from the tool bagand fit it into the hole on the rear bootcrossmember (see fig. 91);

❒ using the screwdriver, operate deviceA-fig. 91 to open the tailgate.

fig. 90 F0C0385m fig. 91 F0C0467m

83

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

HEATED REAR WINDOW FLAPOPENING (where provided)(Multi Wagon versions)

Press button A-fig. 92: it is possible toopen the heated rear window flap to gainaccess to the passenger compartment fig. 93.

TAILGATE CLOSING

To close, lower the tailgate until the lockclicks.

EXTENDING THE BOOT

The boot can be partially (1/3 or 2/3) ortotally extended splitting the rear seat.

In Multi Wagon versions, remove the bag-gage cover following the instructions inparagraph “Baggage cover” to use theboot maximum loading volume.

fig. 92 F0C0366m

fig. 93 F0C0414m

The addition of objects(speakers, spoilers, etc.) on therear shelf or boot lid, exceptthose envisaged by the man-

ufacturer, may prevent the gas filledstruts at the sides of the boot fromworking properly.

When using the boot, makesure the loads you are carry-

ing do not exceed the permittedweight (see section “Technical spec-ifications”). Also make sure the itemsin the boot are arranged properly toprevent them being thrown forwardsand injuring passengers should youbrake sharply.

WARNING

Never travel with objects onthe rear shelf to prevent

them being thrown forwards and in-juring passengers in case of accidentor sharp braking.

WARNING

84

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

Partial extension (1/3 or 2/3) fig. 94-95

The boot extension to the right makes itpossible to carry two passengers on therear seat left-hand side.

The boot extension to the left makes itpossible to carry one passenger on therear seat right-hand side.

Versions with fixed rear seat

Proceed as follows:

❒ lower completely the rear seat head re-straints;

❒ move the seat belt sideways and checkthat the belt is not twisted;

❒ pull the handle in the middle of thecushion fig. 96, and tilt the requiredcushion;

❒ lift seat back retaining lever A-fig. 97and tilt the seat back forward. Lever lift-ing is shown by a “red band” B.

fig. 94 F0C0356m

fig. 95 F0C0357m

fig. 96 F0C0371m fig. 97 F0C0378m

85

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

Versions with rear sliding seat (where provided)

Proceed as follows:



❒ operate the lever B-fig. 98 and adjustthe seat in the required position (e.g.completely forward if you want to ob-tain maximum boot extension);

❒ lift lever A and fold the seat back.

To extend the boot totally

The boot total extension makes it possi-ble to use its maximum loading volume.

Proceed as follows:

❒ for versions with rear sliding seat, fitseat belt buckles into the proper seatsA-fig. 99;

❒ for versions with rear fixed seat, beforefolding the seat back, fit the seat belttabs B-fig. 100 into the proper buck-le C;


fig. 98 F0C0338m

fig. 99 F0C0433m fig. 100 F0C0473m

86

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

fig. 104 F0C0390m


❒ remove the rear parcel shelf and re-lease the upper ends D-fig. 101 of thetwo tie rods by removing eyelets fromthe pins and pushing them in arrow di-rection

For versions with rear fixed seat: removethe second shelf A-fig. 103 releasing pinsfrom their housings B, lifting first the frontpart C-fig. 104 and then the rear part Dfrom both sides. To refit it, reverse theabove procedure.


❒ after tilting the cushion, fold complete-ly rear seat backs (as described previ-ously) to have one single surface.

❒ release shelf pins B-fig. 102 from theirhousings C and remove it.

87

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

For versions with rear sliding seat (whereprovided): remove the boot cover supportA-fig. 105 pushing it from the bottom up-wards, first one side and then the otherone, until releasing it.

Lift seat back retaining lever A-fig. 106set under the seat cushion (both on theright and on the left), and tilt them for-ward to obtain a single surface. Use leverA to adjust the seat back position.

Use lever B to adjust the space inside theboot.

fig. 105 F0C0407m

fig. 106 F0C0338m

88

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

fig. 110 F0C0354m

BOOT COVER (Multi Wagon versions)

The boot cover A-fig. 107 can be rolledup and removed.

To roll it up remove the two rear pins B-fig. 108 from their housings.

IMPORTANT Guide the cover whilerolling it up by holding its handle C-fig. 107.

It is possible to cover only half of the bootsetting the cover as illustrated in figure109.

fig. 109 F0C0353m

fig. 108 F0C0352m

fig. 107 F0C0351m

Removing the boot cover

Roll the cover up to remove it and pull thetwo hooks A-fig. 110 towards the lug-gage compartment inside part (as shownby the arrows).

Then lift and remove the cover.

89

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

To refit the cover, insert the reel ends intheir housings and make sure the fasten-ing hooks are well fastened. Now extendthe cover by pulling its handles, as previ-ously described, and hook the two rearpins B-fig. 111.

IMPORTANT Do not put heavy objects onthe cover which may seriously damage it.

TO RETURN THE REAR SEATBACK TO ITS ORIGINALPOSITION

Move the seat belt sideways and checkthat the belt is not twisted.

Versions with rear fixed seat

Lift the seat backs and push them back-ward until both coupling mechanisms clickin place, check that the “red band” B-fig. 112 at the side of levers A is nolonger visible.

The “red band” B indicates missing seatback coupling.

Reposition the cushions in horizontal po-sition keeping the centre seat belt tongueraised.

fig. 111 F0C0352m fig. 112 F0C0378m

The objects put on the cov-er may be thrown forwards

and injure passengers should youbrake sharply or in the event of an ac-cident.

WARNING

Make sure the seat back iscorrectly hooked on both

sides (“red bands” B-fig. 112 not vis-ible) to prevent seat back beingthrown forwards and injuring pas-sengers should you brake sharply.

WARNING

90

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

Versions with rear sliding seat(where provided)

Lift lever A-fig. 113 (right and left) andreposition the seat back in straight posi-tion.

Take out buckles from their housing tohave them ready for use.

ANCHORING THE LOAD

The boot houses 4 hooks (where provid-ed) fig. 114 to which ropes can be at-tached which ensure that the load is prop-erly secured.

IMPORTANT Never anchor to singlehooks a load exceeding 100 kg.

fig. 113 F0C0336m

fig. 114 F0C0034m

A heavy load that has notbeen secured may cause se-

rious harm.

WARNING

If you want to carry reservefuel in a can, follow law reg-

ulations, only using a certified can,suitably fastened to the load securingeyelets. Even in this way the risk offire is increased in the case of an ac-cident.

WARNING

91

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

SKI TUNNEL (where provided)

This can be used to carry long objects (e.g.skis), fitting them into the tunnel from theboot.

To access it:

❒ lower the rear armrest A-fig. 116;

❒ press handle B-fig. 117 and lower theflap. To close the flap pull tongue C.

IMPORTANT Always check that loads areanchored properly to prevent them beingthrown against the passengers in case ofaccident or sharp braking.

fig. 116 F0C0073m fig. 117 F0C0379mfig. 115 F0C0241m

CARGO BOX (where provided)fig. 115

It consists of a special preformed box tobe used for housing objects located in theboot of cars fitted with rear sliding seatthat enables to obtain uniform loading sur-face.

92

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS BONNET

TO OPEN THE BONNET

Proceed as follows:

❒ pull lever A-fig. 118 in the direction ofthe arrow;

❒ pull lever B-fig. 119 and lift the bon-net.

IMPORTANT Bonnet raising is aided bytwo side gas springs. Do not tamper withthese springs and guide the bonnet whileraising it.

IMPORTANT Before opening the bonnet,check that windscreen wiper arms are notlifted from the windscreen.

TO CLOSE THE BONNET

Lower the bonnet at approx. 20 cm fromthe engine compartment and then let itdrop, ensuring that it is fully closed andnot just held in position by the safetycatch. If the bonnet does not close prop-erly do not push it down but open it againand repeat the above procedure. If thebonnet is not shut properly, the warninglight ´ comes on together with the mes-sage on the display (see section “Warninglights and messages”).

IMPORTANT Always check that the bon-net is closed properly to avoid its openingwhile the car is travelling.

fig. 118 F0C0029m fig. 119 F0C0383m

For safety reasons the bon-net must be closed properly

to avoid its opening while the car istravelling. Therefore, always check itis properly closed and the catch en-gaged. Should you notice that thecatch is not perfectly engaged whentravelling, stop the car immediatelyand close the bonnet.

WARNING

This should only be donewhen the car is stationary.

WARNING

93

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSROOF RACK/

SKI RACK

The roof rack bars shall be secured to theroof in points shown A. Lift tabs B-fig. 120 using the screwdriver providedin the kit to access the seats C for secur-ing the roof rack/ski rack.

A roof rack/ski rack specially designed forthe car is available at Lineaccessori Fiat.

After few kilometers, check that fasteningscrews are firmly tightened.

IMPORTANT Never exceed the max.permissible loads (see section “Technicalspecifications”).

Multi Wagon versions

The car is fitted with two longitudinal barswhich can be used, by adding specific ac-cessories, to carry various objects (e.g.skis, windsurf, etc…).

IMPORTANT Putting cross bars on lon-gitudinal bars fig. 121 inhibits use of thesunroof (Skywindow) (where provided),since its opening interferes with the bars.

fig. 120 F0C0169m fig. 121 F0C0349m

Open the tailgate with carewhen carrying objects on the

roof rack bars to prevent impacts.

WARNING

IMPORTANT Never exceed the max.permissible loads (see section “Technicalspecifications”).

94

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS HEADLIGHTS

ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHTBEAM

Proper adjustment of the headlight beamsis of vital importance for your safety andcomfort and also for the other road users.To ensure you and other drivers have thebest visibility conditions when travellingwith the headlights on, the headlights mustbe set properly. Contact Fiat Dealershipto have the headlights properly adjusted.

IMPORTANT When turning on gas dis-charge headlight lamps (where provided),it is normal that there should be a verticalmovement of lenses, and consequently thesame will also happen to the light beam,for the time required to achieve the cor-rect headlight trim stabilisation, equal toapprox. 2 seconds.

HEADLIGHT AIMING DEVICE

This device can be operated with the ig-nition key at MAR and dipped beams on.When the car is loaded, it slopes back-wards. This means that the headlight beamrises. In this case, it is necessary to returnit to the correct position.

To adjust the headlight slant

Press button A-fig. 122 located on themask aside the steering wheel column; ifthe car is fitted with gas discharge head-lights (xenon), slant adjustment is elec-tronic and therefore button A is not pre-sent.

Press button A at arrow N this will in-crease by one position, press the arrowO on the button, this will lower by oneposition.

The display B-fig. 122 located on the in-strument panel, provides the visual indi-cation of the positions during the adjust-ment operation.

Correct positions as a function of the load

Position 0 - one or two passengers onfront seats.

Position 1 - five passengers.

Position 2 - five passengers + load in theboot.

Position 3 - driver + maximum admittedload in the boot.

IMPORTANT Check beam aiming everytime the load carried changes.

fig. 122 F0C0533m

95

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSFRONT FOG LIGHT

ADJUSTMENT

Contact Fiat Dealership to have the head-lights properly adjusted.

HEADLIGHT BEAMADJUSTMENT ABROAD

The dipped beam headlights are adjustedfor circulation in the country in which thecar is marketed. In countries with oppo-site circulation, to avoid glaring oncom-ing vehicles, it is necessary to cover theareas of the headlight using a special stick-er tape provided for the purpose and avail-able at Lineaccessori Fiat. Contact FiatDealership.

ABS SYSTEM

The car is fitted with ABS braking system,which prevents the wheels from lockingwhen braking, makes the most of road gripand gives the best control when emer-gency braking under difficult road condi-tions.

System is completed by EBD (ElectronicBraking Force Distribution), which dis-tributes the braking action between frontand rear wheels.

IMPORTANT To have the maximum ef-ficiency of the braking system, it is neces-sary a setting period of about 500 km: dur-ing this period, it is better to avoid sharp,repeated and prolonged brakes.

ABS SYSTEM INTERVENTION

When the ABS cuts in, you will feel thebrake pedal pulsating slightly and the sys-tem get noisier: it means that the speedshould be altered to fit the type of roadsurface.

If the ABS system cuts in, it is a sign thatthe grip between tyre and the road sur-face has reached the limit: you must slowdown to match the speed to the road gripavailable.

If the ABS system cuts in itis a sign that the grip be-

tween the tyre and the road surfacehas reached the limit you must slowdown to match the speed to the roadgrip available.

WARNING

96

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS FAILURE INDICATIONS

ABS failure

ABS failure is indicated by the turning onof warning light >on the instrument pan-el together with the dedicated message onthe display (see section “Warning lightsand messages”). In this case the brakingsystem is still efficient, though without theaid of the ABS system. Drive carefully tothe closest Fiat Dealership to have the sys-tem checked.

EBD failure

If the warning lights > and x (togetherwith the message on the display) come onthis indicates a fault in the EBD system(see section “Warning lights and mes-sages”).

In this case with sharp braking the rearwheels might lock too early, with the pos-sibility of skidding. Drive extremely care-fully to the nearest Fiat Dealership to havethe system checked.

BRAKE ASSIST (emergency braking assistance)(where provided)

The system, which cannot be cut out, rec-ognizes emergency braking (on the groundof the brake pedal operation speed) andconsiderably increases the pressure in thebraking circuit.

Brake Assist is deactivated on the versionsequipped with ESP, in the event of ESP sys-tem failure (indicated by warning light áswitching on together with the messageon the display).

When the ABS cuts in, andyou feel the brake pedal pul-

sating, do not remove your foot, butkeep it pressed; in doing so you willstop in the shortest amount of spacepossible under the current road con-ditions.

WARNING

If warning light x comes on(together with the message

on the display), stop the car imme-diately and contact the nearest FiatDealership. Fluid leaks from the hy-draulic system, in fact, can compro-mise the braking system, both tradi-tional systems and systems with ABS.

WARNING

The ABS exploits the tyre-road grip at the best, but it

cannot improve it; you should there-fore take every care when driving onslippery surfaces without taking un-necessary risks.

WARNING

97

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSESP SYSTEM (Electronic

Stability Program) (where provided)

The ESP system is an electronic systemcontrolling the car stability in the event oftyre grip loss.

The ESP system is therefore particularlyuseful when grip conditions of the roadsurfaces changes.

ABS SYSTEM INTERVENTION

It is signalled by the blinking of the warn-ing light á on the instrument panel, to in-form the driver that the car is in criticalstability and grip conditions.

ESP SYSTEM OPERATION

The ESP system is automatically activat-ed when the car is started and cannot bede-activated.

FAILURE INDICATIONS

In the event of failure, the ESP system isautomatically disconnected and the warn-ing light áwill turn on glowing steadily onthe instrument panel, together with themessage on the display (see section“Warning lights and messages”). In thiscase, go to a Fiat Dealership as soon aspossible.

Performance of the ESP sys-tem, in terms of active safe-

ty should not induce the driver to takepointless and unnecessary risks. Thestyle of driving must in any case al-ways be adapted to the conditions ofthe road surface, visibility an traffic.Road safety is always the driver’s re-sponsibility.

WARNING

ESP SYSTEM INITIALISATION(after disconnecting the battery)

After reconnecting the battery, to restoreregular operation of the ESP system, pro-ceed as follows:

❒ turn the ignition key to MAR;

❒ turn the steering wheel 1/4 turn bothclockwise and counterclockwise (topass through position “straightwheels”);

❒ turn the ignition key to STOP and thenback to MAR.

A few seconds later the warning light willturn off; if it stays on contact Fiat Dealer-ship.

These operations can also be performedwith the engine on.

During the use of the space-saver spare wheel, the ESP

system carries on working. However,you must remind that the space-saverspare wheel has dimensions smallerthan the standard tyre and thereforeits grip is reduced as to the other cartyres.

WARNING

For correct operation of theESP system, the tyres must

absolutely be of the same brand andtype on all wheels, in perfect condi-tions and, above all, of type, brandand size specified.

WARNING

98

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS ASR SYSTEM

(Antislip Regulation)

It is an integral part of the ESP system, itcontrols car drive and cuts in automati-cally every time one or both drivingwheels slip.

According to slipping conditions, two dif-ferent control systems are activated:

❒ if the slipping involves both the drivingwheels, the ASR function intervenes re-ducing the power transmitted by theengine;

❒ if the slipping involves only one drivingwheel, the ASR system cuts in auto-matically braking the wheel that is slip-ping.

The action of the ASR is particularly help-ful in the following circumstances:

❒ slipping of the inner wheel due to theeffect of dynamic load changes or ex-cessive acceleration;

❒ too much power transmitted to thewheels also in relation to the conditionsof the road surface;

❒ acceleration on slippery, snowy orfrozen surfaces;

❒ in the case of loss of grip on a wet sur-face (aquaplaning).

Switching on/off of the ASR system

The ASR system switches on automaticallyeach time the engine is started.

Switching on/off is indicated by the rele-vant message on the display (see section“Warning lights and messages”).

When travelling ASR can be switched offand on again pressing switch A-fig. 123on the central console.

When the ASR is switched off this isshown by the lighting up of the led on theswitch and by the relevant message on thedisplay (see section “Warning lights andmessages”).

If the ASR is switched off when travelling,it will turn on again automatically the nexttime the engine is started.

When travelling on snowy roads withsnow chains, it may be helpful to turn theASR off: in fact, in these conditions, slip-ping of the driving wheels when moving offmakes it possible to obtain better drive.

The performance of the sys-tem, in terms of active safe-

ty should not induce the driver to takepointless and unnecessary risks. Thestyle of driving must in any case al-ways be adapted to the conditions ofthe road surface, visibility an traffic.Road safety is always the driver’s re-sponsibility.

WARNING

fig. 123 F0C0066m

99

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSFailure indications

In the event of malfunctioning, the ASRsystem is automatically disconnected andthe warning light á will come on withfixed light on the instrument panel to-gether with the message on the display(see section “Warning lights and mes-sages”). In this case contact Fiat Dealer-ship as soon as possible.

MSR system (engine braking torque control)

The car is fitted with a special system, in-tegral with the ASR system, that in case ofsudden gear shifting, cuts in providingtorque to the engine thus preventing ex-cessive driving wheel drive that, speciallyin poor grip conditions, can lead to loss ofstability.

EOBD SYSTEM

The EOBD system (European On BoardDiagnosis) allows continuous diagnosis ofthe components of the car correlated withemissions.

It also alerts the driver, by turning on thewarning light U on the instrument pan-el (together with the message on the dis-play) (see section “Warning lights andmessages”), when these components areno longer in peak conditions.

The objective is:

❒ to keep the system efficiency undercontrol;

❒ warn when a fault causes emissions lev-els to increase;

❒ warn of the need to replace deterio-rated components.

The system also has a diagnostic connec-tor that can be interfaced with appropri-ate tools, which makes it possible to readthe error codes stored in the control unit,together with a series of specific parame-ters for engine operation and diagnosis.This check can also be carried out by thetraffic police.

When using the spare wheel,the ASR system is excluded

and the warning light á on the in-strument panel turns on glowingsteadily together with the message onthe display (see section “Warninglights and messages”).

WARNING

For correct operation of theASR system, the tyres must

absolutely be of the same brand andtype on all wheels, in perfect condi-tions and, above all, of type, brandand size specified.

WARNING

100

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS IMPORTANT After eliminating the in-

convenience, to check the system com-pletely, Fiat Dealerships are obliged to runa bench test and, if necessary, road testswhich may also call for a long journey.

SOUND SYSTEM (where provided)

The Fiat Stilo sound system is of the fixedtype: the instructions for use are given inthe attached Supplement.

ACTUAL versions are provided with pre-setting for sound system with aerial, wiringand speakers.

To install the sound system, loosen screwA-fig. 124 and remove the oddmentcompartment, install the compartmentprovided with the sound system and thepower cables for the electric connection.

If turning the ignition key toMAR, the warning light Udoes not turn on or if, whiletravelling it turns on glowing

steadily or flashing (together with themessage on the display), contact FiatDealership as soon as possible. Warn-ing light U operation can be checkedby means of special equipment by traf-fic agents. Always comply with the traf-fic regulations in force in the countrywhere you are travelling.

fig. 124 F0C0440m

IMPORTANT To guarantee proper soundand mechanical properties (e.g. watertightness and door soundproofing) at Lin-eaccessori Fiat is available a kit includingan aerial adapter that improves AM fre-quency reception through the amplifier onthe aerial support.

101

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSACCESSORIES

PURCHASED BY THEOWNER

If after buying the car, you decide to installelectrical accessories that require a per-manent electric supply (alarm, satellite an-titheft system, etc.) or accessories that inany case burden the electric supply, con-tact Fiat Dealership, whose qualified per-sonnel, besides suggesting the most suit-able devices belonging to Lineaccessori Fi-at, will also evaluate the overall electric ab-sorption, checking whether the car’s elec-tric system is able to withstand the loadrequired, or whether it needs to be inte-grated with a more powerful battery.

INSTALLATION OFELECTRIC/ELECTRONICDEVICES

Electric/electronic devices installed afterbuying the car or in aftermarket shall bearthe and marking:

Fiat Auto S.p.A. authorizes the installationof transceivers provided that installationis carried out at a specialized shop, work-manlike performed and in compliance withmanufacturer's specifications.

IMPORTANT Installation of devices re-sulting in modifications of car characteris-tics may cause driving license seizing bytraffic agents and also the lapse of the war-ranty as concerns defects due to theabovementioned modification or traceableback to it directly or indirectly.

Fiat Auto S.p.A. declines all responsibilityfor damages caused by the installation ofnon-genuine accessories or not recom-mended by Fiat Auto S.p.A. and installednot in compliance with the specified re-quirements.

RADIO TRANSMITTERSAND CELLULARTELEPHONES

Mobile phones and other radio transceiv-er equipment (e.g.: HAM radio systemsand the like) shall not be used inside thecar unless a separate aerial is mounted.

IMPORTANT The use of mobile phones,HAM radio systems or other similar de-vices inside the passenger compartment(without separate aerial) may cause elec-tronic systems equipping the car to mal-function. This could compromise safety inaddition to constituting a potential hazardfor the passengers.

In addition, transmission and reception ofthese devices may be affected by theshielding effect of the car body.

As concerns the use of mobile phones(GSM, GPRS, UMTS) with homolo-gation, keep strictly to the mobile phonemanufacturer's specifications.

Take care when fitting addi-tional spoilers, alloy rims and

non-standard wheel caps: they mightreduce ventilation of the brakes, thustheir efficiency, during abrupt and re-peated braking, or long downhillslopes. Make sure that nothing (mats,etc.) gets in the way of the pedalswhen they are pushed down.

WARNING

102

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS “DUALDRIVE” ELECTRIC

POWER STEERINGSYSTEM

The car is provided with the electricallycontrolled power steering system called“Dualdrive” working only with ignition keyat MAR and engine running, that can becustomised by the driver according to thedriving conditions.

IMPORTANT When turning quickly theignition key, power steering full operationis obtained after 1-2 seconds.

ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION(CITY function)

To connect/disconnect the CITY function,push the button A-fig. 125 located on thecentral tunnel on the side of the gearboxcontrol lever.

Connection of this function is reported bythe word CITY on the “Multifunction dis-play”.

When the CITY function is on the steer-ing wheel effort is lighter and thus parkingoperations are easier: therefore this func-tion is particularly useful for driving in citycentres.

FAILURE INDICATIONS

Any failure is indicated by warning light gcoming on (together with the message onthe display) (see section “Warning lightsand messages”).

In the event of electric power steering sys-tem failure, the car can be driven with me-chanical steering.

IMPORTANT Under certain circum-stances, factors independent from theelectric power steering could cause the il-lumination of the warning light g on theinstrument panel. We suggest to stop im-mediately the car, turn off the engine forabout 20 seconds and then re-start thecar. If the warning light g stays on (to-gether with the message on the display),contact Fiat Dealership.

IMPORTANT The steering may becomeslightly stiff following parking manoeuvresincluding a great deal of steering. This isnormal and caused by a system to preventmotor overheating. No servicing is re-quired. The electrical power steering sys-tem will return to normal operation thenext time the car is used.

fig. 125 F0C0065m

103

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSPARKING SENSORS

(where provided)

Parking sensors are located in the rearbumper fig. 126 (saloon versions) andfig. 127 (Multi Wagon versions) and theirfunction is to inform the driver, throughan intermittent buzzer, about the pres-ence of obstacles behind the car.

ACTIVATION

Sensors are automatically activated whenthe reverse gear is engaged.

As the distance from the obstacle behindthe car decreases, the acoustic alarm be-comes more frequent.

BUZZER WARNINGS

When the reverse gear is engaged an in-termittent acoustic signal is automaticallyactivated.

The acoustic signal:

❒ becomes louder as the reduction of dis-tance between the car and the obstacledecreases;

❒ becomes continuous when the distancebetween the car and the obstacle is lessthat 30 cm and stops immediately if thedistance raises.

❒ is constant if the distance is unvaried.If this situation takes place for side sen-sors, the signal is stopped after about 3seconds to prevent sound indicationswhen performing manoeuvres nearwalls.



WARNING

Always switch the engine off,remove the key from the

starting device and actuate the steer-ing lock before carrying out any main-tenance operation, especially whenthe wheels are raised from theground. In case this is not possible(e.g. when the key must be in MARposition or the engine running), re-move the electric power steeringmain fuse before carrying out anymaintenance operation.

WARNING

fig. 126 F0C0301m

fig. 127 F0C0364m

104

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS Detection distances

Central action radius ......................150 cm

Side action radius ............................ 60 cm

If several obstacles are detected, the con-trol unit indicates the nearest one.

FAILURE INDICATIONS

In the event of sensor failures, when en-gaging the reverse gear the driver iswarned by the turning on of warning lightè on the instrument panel and by the rel-evant message on the display (see section“Warning lights and messages”).

OPERATION WITH TRAILER

Parking sensor operation is deactivatedautomatically when the trailer electric ca-ble plug is fitted into the car tow hooksocket.

Sensors are reactivated when removingthe trailer cable plug.

GENERAL WARNINGS

❒ When parking, take the utmost care toobstacles set above or under the sen-sors.

❒ Objects set close to the car front orrear part, under certain circumstancesare not detected and could thereforecause damages to the car.

❒ Indications sent by the sensors can bealtered by dirt, snow or ice depositedon the sensors or by ultrasound sys-tems (e.g.: truck pneumatic brakes orpneumatic hammers) set nearby thecar.

For proper operation, theparking sensors set on thebumpers shall be clean frommud, dirt, snow or ice. When

cleaning the sensors, take the utmostcare to prevent their damaging; do notuse therefore dry or rough clothes. Sen-sors shall be washed with clean waterand car detergent, if required. In wash-ing stations, clean sensors quickly keep-ing the vapour jet/high pressure wash-ing nozzles at 10 cm at least from thesensors.

Parking manoeuvres howev-er are always under the dri-

ver’s responsibility that shall alwayscheck the absence of people (spe-cially children) or animals in the ma-noeuvre space. This system is just ahelp for the driver but she/he shallnever reduce attention during dan-gerous manoeuvres even if performedat low speed.

WARNING

105

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLSAT THE FILLING

STATION

PETROL ENGINES

Use only unleaded petrol.

To prevent errors, the diameter of the fu-el tank filler is too small to introduce a leadpetrol pump filler. Use petrol with a rat-ed octane number (R.O.N.) not lowerthan 95.

IMPORTANT An inefficient catalyst leadsto harmful exhaust emissions, thus con-tributing to air pollution.

IMPORTANT Never use leaded petrol,even in small amount or in an emergency,as this would damage the catalyst beyondrepair.

DIESEL ENGINES

If the outside temperature is very low, thediesel thickens due to the formation ofparaffins and could clog the diesel fuel filter.

In order to avoid these problems, differenttypes of diesel are distributed according tothe season: summer type, winter type arc-tic type (mountains/cold areas).

If refuelling with diesel fuel not suitable forthe current temperature, mix diesel fuelwith TUTELA DIESEL ART additive in theproportions stated on the can, putting firstthe antifreeze in the tank and then thediesel fuel.

Refuel with local diesel fuel if the car isused/parked in the mountains or in coldareas for a long period. In this event youare recommended to keep an amount offuel higher than 50% in the tank.

The car must only be filledwith diesel fuel for motor ve-hicles, in compliance with Eu-ropean Specification EN590.

The use of other products or mixturesmay irreparably damage the enginewith invalidation of the warranty dueto the damage caused. In the event ofaccidentally filling with another typeof fuel, do not start the engine andempty the tank. If the engine has beenrun even for only a very short time, inaddition to the tank, it is also necessaryto drain out the whole fuel circuit.

REFUELLING

To guarantee full tank filling, carry out tworefuelling operations after the first click ofthe fuel delivery gun. Avoid further top-ping up operations that could cause dam-ages to the fuel system.

106

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

FUEL FILLER CAP fig. 128

The fuel filler cap A is fitted with an an-tiloss device B which fastens it to the lidC so it cannot be mislaid.

To slacken the cap, turn it counterclock-wise and remove it.

The cap A is fitted with key-lock: open thelid C then, turn the ignition key in the lockand open the cap.

When refuelling, secure the cap to the de-vice inside the lid as shown in the figure.

IMPORTANT The sealing of the tank maycause light pressurising in the tank. A lit-tle breathing off, while slackening the cap,is absolutely normal.

After refuelling, turn the cap clockwise un-til it clicks, then turn the key clockwise,remove it and close the flap.

fig. 128 F0C0199m

Do not put naked flames orlighted cigarettes near the

fuel filler hole as there is a danger offire. Do not bend too close to the holeeither so as not to breathe in harmfulvapours.

WARNING

107

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS

FUEL LID EMERGENCYOPENINGS

Saloon versions

Open flap A-fig. 129 set on the right sideof the boot and pull the string located in-side the flap.


❒ pull the string E located inside the flap.Multi Wagon versions

Proceed as follows:

❒ turn the knob A-fig. 130 and open theflap B set on the right side of the boot;

❒ hold the tongue C-fig. 131 to open thesecond flap D;

108

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND

CONT

ROLS Diesel Particulate Filter clogged

If the dedicated message is displayed, re-fer to section “Warning lights and mes-sages”.

During normal service thecatalyst and the diesel par-

ticulate filter (DPF) reach high tem-peratures. Do not therefore park thecar over inflammable materials (grass,dry leaves, pine needles, etc.): firehazard.

WARNING

PROTECTING THEENVIRONMENT

The devices for curtailing petrol engineemissions are the following:

❒ three-way catalytic converter;

❒ Lambda sensors;

❒ fuel evaporation system.

In addition, do not let the engine run, evenfor a test, with one or more spark plugsdisconnected.

The devices for curtailing diesel fuel en-gine emissions are the following:

❒ oxidising catalytic converter;

❒ exhaust gas recirculation system(E.G.R.);

❒ Lambda sensors;

❒ diesel particulate filter (DPF) (whereprovided it is fitted instead of the Lamb-da sensor).

DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER(DPF) (where provided)

The Diesel Particulate Filter is a mechan-ical filter, integral with the exhaust system,that physically traps particulates presentin the exhaust gases of Diesel engines.

The diesel particular filter has been adopt-ed to eliminate almost totally particulatesin compliance with current / future lawregulations.

During normal use of the car, the enginecontrol unit records a set of data (e.g.:travel time, type of route, temperatures,etc.) and it will then calculate how muchparticulates has been trapped by the filter.

Since this filter physically traps particulates,it shall be cleaned (reclaimed) at regularintervals by burning carbon particles. Re-claiming procedure is controlled auto-matically by the engine control unit ac-cording to the filter conditions and theconditions of use of the car. During re-claiming the following phenomena couldtake place: idling slight increase, fan acti-vation, slight smoke increase, high exhausttemperatures. These situations shall notbe considered as faults and they do not af-fect car performance and environment.

109

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

S

SEAT BELTS ............................................................................ 110

PRETENSIONERS ................................................................... 113

CARRYING CHILDREN SAFELY....................................... 116

PRESETTING FOR MOUNTING THE “ISOFIX TYPE” CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM ............... 121

PRESETTING FOR MOUNTING THE “UNIVERSAL ISOFIX” CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM .. 124

FRONT AIR BAGS ................................................................. 126

SIDE AIR BAGS (Side bag - Window bag) ...................... 130

SSAAFFEETTYY DDEEVVIICCEESS

110

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

S

When the car is parked on a steep slopethe reel mechanism may block; this is nor-mal. The reel mechanism prevents thewebbing coming out when it is jerked orif the car brakes sharply, in a collision orwhen cornering at high speed.

The rear seat is fitted with inertial seatbelts with three anchor points and reel forthe side and centre seats.

SEAT BELTS

USING THE SEAT BELTS

The belt should be worn keeping the cheststraight and rested against the seat back.

To fasten the seat belts, take hold thetongue A-fig. 1 and insert it into the buck-le B, until hearing the locking click.

At removal, if it jams, let it rewind for ashort stretch, then pull it out again with-out jerking.

To unfasten the seat belts, press buttonC. Guide the seat belt with your handwhile it is rewinding, to prevent it fromtwisting.

Through the reel, the belt automaticallyadapts to the body of the passenger wear-ing it, allowing freedom of movement.

Never press button C-fig. 1when travelling.

WARNING

Rear seat belts shall be worn as shown infig. 2

fig. 1 F0C0075m fig. 2 F0C0267m

111

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

S

When reclining the rear seat backs, to putthe seat buckles back properly, use thesuitable housings A-fig. 3 obtained in thecushion.

Take out buckles from their housings (ver-sions with rear sliding seat) when reset-ting the seat in straight position, to havethem ready for use.

IMPORTANT When the seat back is cou-pled properly, the “red band” B-fig. 4 pre-sent aside lever A disappears. The “redband” actually indicates improper seatback coupling. As concerns versions fittedwith sliding seat, always check that theback is locked in proper position; theseversions are fitted with reclining seat:when resetting it in proper position, makesure to hear the locking click.

IMPORTANT Remember that in theevent of a violent collision, back seat pas-sengers not wearing seat belts also rep-resent a serious danger for the front seatpassengers.

fig. 3 F0C0433m fig. 4 F0C0378m

Make sure the seat back iscorrectly hooked on both

sides (“red bands” B-fig. 4 not visible)to prevent seat back being thrownforwards and injuring passengersshould you brake sharply.

WARNING

IMPORTANT After putting the seats backto their travelling position, restore theseat belt position to make them ready foruse.

112

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SS.B.R. SYSTEM

The car is fitted with the S.B.R. system(Seat Belt Reminder), consisting of abuzzer which, together with the blinkingof warning light < on the instrument pan-el, warns the driver to fasten the seat belt.

The buzzer can be deactivated temporar-ily (until next engine stop) by the follow-ing procedure, to be carried out within 1 minute from turning the ignition key toMAR:

❒ fasten the driver’s seat belt.

❒ wait for over 20 seconds and then re-lease the driver’s seat belt.

For permanent deactivation, contact FiatDealership.

The S.B.R. system can only be resetthrough the set-up menu (see section“Warning lights and messages” at para-graph “Seat belts not fastened”).

FRONT SEAT BELT HEIGHTADJUSTMENT

Four different adjustments in height areprovided.

To adjust, press button A-fig. 5 and low-er or raise the grip B.

Always adjust the height of the seat beltto fit the person wearing it. This precau-tion could greatly reduce the risk of injuryin case of collision.

Correct adjustment is obtained when thebelt passes half way between the end ofthe shoulder and the neck.

fig. 5 F0C0096m

Make the height adjustmentwhen the car is stationary.

WARNING

After adjustment, alwayscheck that the slider is an-

chored in one of the positions pro-vided. To do this, with the button A-fig. 5 released, exert a further pres-sure to allow the anchor device tocatch if release did not take place atone of the preset position.

WARNING

113

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

S

PRETENSIONERS

To increase the efficiency of the front andrear (where provided) seat belts, the caris fitted with pretensioners. These devices,in the event of violent front crash, rewindthe seat belts a few centimetres. In thisway they ensure that the seat belt adheresperfectly to the wearer before the re-straining action begins. The seat belt locksto indicate that the device has intervened;the seat belt cannot be drawn back upeven when guiding it manually.

IMPORTANT To obtain the highest de-gree of protection from the action of thepretensioning device, wear the seat beltkeeping it firmly close to the chest andpelvis.

Front seat pretensioners activate only iffront seat belts are properly fitted intobuckles. A small amount of smoke may beproduced. This smoke is in no way toxicand presents no fire hazard.

LOAD LIMITERS

To increase passenger’s safety, the frontand rear (where provided) seat belt reelscontain a load limiter which allows con-trolled sag in such a way as to dose theforce acting on the shoulders during thebelt restraining action in case of frontcrash.

The pretensioner can onlybe used once. After a colli-

sion that has triggered it, have it re-placed at a Fiat Dealership. Preten-sioner validity is written on the labelinside the lower oddment compart-ment. Pretensioners should be re-placed at Fiat Dealership as this dateapproaches.

WARNING

Operations which lead toknocks, vibrations or localisedheating (over 100°C for amaximum of 6 hours) in the

area around the pretensioners maycause damage or trigger them. Thesedevices are not affected by vibrationscaused by irregularities of the road sur-face or low obstacles such as kerbs, etc.Contact a Fiat Dealership for any as-sistance.

The pretensioner does not require anymaintenance or greasing. Anything thatmodifies its original conditions invalidatesits efficiency. If due to unusual naturalevents (floods, seas storm, etc.) the devicehas been affected by water and mud, itmust necessarily be replaced.

IMPORTANT Never travel with a childsitting on the passenger’s lap with a sin-gle belt to protect them both fig. 8. Donot fasten other objects to the body.

fig. 6 F0C0015m fig. 7 F0C0013m

For maximum safety, keepthe back of your seat up-

right, lean back into it and make surethe seat belt fits closely across yourchest and hips. Make sure that theseat belts of the front and rear pas-sengers are fastened at all times! Youincrease the risk of serious injury ordeath in a collision if you travel withthe belts unfastened.

WARNING

fig. 8 F0C0014m

114

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

S

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FORUSING THE SEAT BELTS

The driver must comply with (and havethe car occupants follow) all the local le-gal regulations concerning the use of seatbelts. Always fasten the seat belts beforestarting.

Seat belts are also to be worn by expec-tant mothers: the risk of injury in the caseof accident is greatly reduced for them andthe unborn child if they are wearing a seatbelt. Of course they must position thelower part of the belt very low down sothat it passes under the abdomen (as il-lustrated in fig. 6).

IMPORTANT The belt should not be twist-ed. The upper part should pass over theshoulder and cross the chest diagonally. Thelower part should adhere to the pelvis (asshown in fig. 7) and not the abdomen of thepassenger. Do not use any objects (pegs,stoppers, etc.) to keep the belts away fromthe body.

115

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

S

Under no circumstancesshould the components of the

seat belts and pretensioners be tam-pered with or removed. Any operationshould be carried out by qualified andauthorised personnel. Always contacta Fiat Dealership.

WARNING

If the belt has been subject-ed to heavy stress, for ex-

ample after an accident, it should bechanged completely together withthe anchors, anchor fastening screwsand the pretensioners. In fact, even ifthe belt has no visible defects, it couldhave lost its resilience.

WARNING

HOW TO KEEP THE SEATBELTS ALWAYS IN EFFICIENTCONDITIONS

Observe the following:

❒ always use the belt with the tap taut andnever twisted; make sure that it is freeto run without impediments;

❒ after a serious accident, replace the beltbeing worn at that time, even if it doesnot appear damaged. Always replacethe seat belts if pretensioners havebeen activated;

❒ to clean the belts, wash by hand withneutral soap, rinse and leave to dry inthe shade. Never use strong deter-gents, bleach or dyes or other chemi-cal substance that might weaken the fi-bres;

❒ prevent the reels from getting wet:their correct operation is only guaran-teed if water does not get inside;

❒ replace the seat belt when showing sig-nificant wear or cut signs.

116

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SSERIOUS DANGER: Neverplace cradle child’s seats fac-

ing backwards on the frontpassenger seat of cars fittedwith passenger’s air bag since

the air bag activation could cause se-rious injuries, even mortal. You areadvised to carry children always onthe rear seat, as this is the most pro-tected position in the case of a crash.In any case, children’s seats must ab-solutely not be fitted on the front seatof cars with passenger’s air bag, whichduring inflation could cause seriousinjury, even mortal, regardless of theseriousness of the crash that triggeredit. Children may be placed on thefront seat of cars fitted with passen-ger’s air bag deactivation. In this case,it is absolutely necessary to check thewarning light F on the instrumentpanel, to make sure that deactivationhas actually taken place (see para-graph “Front passenger air bag” atparagraph “Front air bags”). Thefront passenger seat shall be adjust-ed in the most backward position toprevent any contact between child’sseat and dashboard.

WARNINGCARRYING CHILDRENSAFELY

For optimal protection in the event of acrash, all passengers must be seated andwearing adequate restraint systems.

This is even more important for children.

This prescription is compulsory in all ECcountries according to EC Directive2003/20/EC.

Compared with adults, their head is pro-portionally larger and heavier than the restof the body, while the muscles and bonestructure are not completely developed.Therefore, correct restraint systems arenecessary, other than adult seat belts.

The results of research on the best childrestraint systems are contained in the Eu-ropean Standard EEC-R44. This Standardenforces the use of restraint systems clas-sified in five groups:

Group 0 0-10 kg in weight

Group 0+ 0-13 kg in weight




As it may be noted, the groups overlappartly and in fact, in commerce it is pos-sible to find devices that cover more thanone weight group.

All restraint devices must bear the certi-fication data, together with the controlbrand, on a solidly fixed label which mustabsolutely never be removed.

Over 1.50 m in height, from the point ofview of restraint systems, children areconsidered as adults and wear the seatbelts normally.

Lineaccessori Fiat offers seats for eachweight group, which are the recommend-ed choice, as they have been designed andexperimented specifically for Fiat cars.

117

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

S

GROUP 0 and 0+

Babies up to 13 kg must be carried facingbackwards on a cradle seat, which, sup-porting the head, does not induce stresson the neck in the event of sharp decel-eration.

The cradle is restrained by the car seatbelts, as shown in fig. 9 and in turn it mustrestrain the child with its own belts.

fig. 9 F0C0429m fig. 10 F0C0430m

The figure is only an exam-ple for mounting. Attain to

the instructions for fastening whichmust be enclosed with the specificchild restraining system you are using.

WARNING

Seats exist which are suit-able for covering weight

groups 0 and 1 with a rear connectionto the car belts and their own belts torestrain the child. Due to their size,they can be dangerous if installed in-correctly fastened to the car beltswith a cushion. Carefully follow theinstructions for installation providedwith the seat.

WARNING

GROUP 1

Starting from 9 kg to 18 kg in weight, chil-dren may be carried facing forwards, withseat fitted with front cushion, throughwhich the car seat belt restrains both childand seat fig. 10.

118

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

S

GROUP 2

Starting from 15 kg to 25 kg in weight, chil-dren may be restrained directly by the carbelts fig. 11. The only function of the seatis to position the child correctly in rela-tion to the belts, so that the diagonal partadheres to the chest and not to the neckand that the horizontal part clings to thechild’s pelvis and not the abdomen.

GROUP 3

For children from 22 kg to 36 kg the sizeof the child’s chest no longer requires asupport to space the child’s back from theseat back.

Fig. 12 shows proper child seat posi-tioning on the rear seat.

Children taller than 1.50 m can wear seatbelts like adults.

fig. 11 F0C0431m fig. 12 F0C0432m

Figures are only an examplefor mounting. Attain to the

instructions for fastening which mustbe enclosed with the specific child re-straining system you are using.

WARNING

119

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

S

PASSENGER SEAT COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS ON CHILD’S SEAT USE

Your car complies with the new European Directive 2000/3/EC regulating child’s seat assembling on the different car seats accord-ing to the following tables:

3/5-door version, double rear seat

5-door version, rear sliding seat

SEAT

Group Range of weight Front passenger Rear passenger Central passenger

Group 0, 0+ up to 13 kg U U U

Group 1 9-18 kg U U U



Front passenger

Central passenger

Key:

U = suitable for child restraint systems of the “Universal” category, according to European Standard EEC-R44 for the specified “Groups”.

L = suitable for certain child’s restraint systems available at Lineaccessori Fiat for the specified group.

SEAT

Group Range of weight

Group 0, 0+ up to 13 kg U U L L

Group 1 9-18 kg U U L L



RH side rear passenger

LHside rear passenger

120

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SBelow is a summary of the rules ofsafety to be followed for carryingchildren:

❒ The recommended position for in-stalling children’s seat is on the rearseat, as it is the most protected in thecase of a crash.

❒ If the passenger’s air bag is deactivatedalways check the warning light F onthe instrument panel to make sure thatit has actually been deactivated.

❒ Attain to the instructions for fasteningthe specific child restraint system whichyou are using. These instructions mustbe provided by the manufacturer. Keepthe child restraint system installation in-structions with the car documents andthis Handbook. Never use a child re-straint system without installation in-structions.

❒ Always check the seat belt is well fas-tened by pulling the webbing.

❒ Only one child is to be strapped to eachretaining system.

❒ Always check the seat belts do not fitaround the child’s throat.

❒ While travelling, do not let the child sitincorrectly or release the belts.

❒ Passengers should never carry childrenon their laps. No-one, however strongthey are, can hold a child in the eventof a crash.

❒ In case of an accident, replace the seatwith a new one.

Never place cradle child’sseats facing backwards on

the front passenger seat of cars fittedwith passenger air bag since the airbag activation could cause serious in-juries, even mortal. You are advisedto carry children always on the rearseat, as this is the most protected po-sition in the case of a crash.

WARNING

121

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

S

PRESETTING FOR MOUNTING THE“ISOFIX TYPE” CHILD RESTRAINTSYSTEM

This car is preset for mounting the Isofixtype child restraint system, a new Euro-pean standardised system for carrying chil-dren safely. Isofix child restraint systemis an additional option that does not pre-vent from using traditional child restraintsystems. Isofix type child restraint systemcovers three groups: 0, 0+ and 1.

Due to its different anchoring system, theIsofix type child restraint system shall beanchored to the proper metal rings set be-tween rear seat back and cushion A-fig. 13 or in the rear seat cover B-fig. 14(according to versions).

It is possible to mount both the traditionalrestraint system and the Isofix type one,one on the left and the other on the right,for example.

Since sizes are different, on the rear seatsit is possible to install max. two Isofix typeseats using the proper couplings or max.three traditional child’s seats using the seatbelts. On the front passenger seat it is pos-sible to mount only traditional child’sseats.

Lineaccessori Fiat provides the “KiddyIsofix” seat, certified according to Euro-pean Standard ECE-R44/03, for babies upto 13 kg weight to be positioned facingbackwards (groups 0 and 0+) and for ba-bies from 9 to 18 kg weight that is to bepositioned facing the running direction(group 1). Remember that in case of Isofixtype seats, you can only use those seatsdesigned, tested and approved for this car.

fig. 13 F0C0274m fig. 14 F0C0273m

Mount the child restraintsystem only with the car sta-

tionary. The Isofix child restraint sys-tem is properly anchored to themounting brackets when clicks areheard. In any case, keep to the in-stallation instructions that must beprovided by the child restraint systemManufacturer.

WARNING

122

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

S

FITTING THE ISOFIX TYPE SEAT

Groups 0 and 0+

For children of the 0, 0+ weight group (ba-bies up to 13 kg), the child’s seat is facingbackwards and the child is restrained bythe child’s seat belts D-fig. 15.

As the child grows, passing to weightgroup 1 (9-18 kg) refit it facing forwardsfollowing the instructions provided withthe child restraint system.

For proper mounting proceed as follows:

❒ move the rear sliding seat fully back-wards with the seat back at 4th position,as shown in fig. 16.

❒ check whether the release lever B-fig. 15 is at rest position (inward);

❒ find the presetting brackets A, then po-sition the child restraint system withthe fastening devices C aligned with thebrackets;

❒ push the child restraint system untilhearing locking clicks;

❒ check proper locking by moving thechild’s seat with force: the built-in safe-ty mechanism actually inhibits improp-er coupling with only one couplinglocked.

fig. 16 F0C0312m

fig. 15 F0C0268m

In case of rear fixed seat andif the Isofix type restraint

system is set facing backwards, thepassenger’s seat will have to be pulledback until it touches the seat restraintsystem back. In case of rear slidingseat, move the front seat forward toa position from half its stroke forth.

WARNING

123

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

S

Group 1

For proper mounting proceed as follows:

❒ move the rear sliding seat fully back-wards with the seat back at 4th position,as shown in fig. 16;

❒ check whether the release lever B-fig. 17 is at rest position (inward);

❒ find the presetting brackets A, then po-sition the child restraint system withthe fastening devices C aligned with thebrackets;

❒ push the child restraint system untilhearing locking clicks;

❒ for seats positioned facing the runningdirection, hook the upper belt D-fig. 18 (in the upper seat pocket) to thering E in the boot;

❒ Check proper locking by moving thechild’s seat with force: the built-in safe-ty mechanism actually inhibits improp-er coupling with only one couplinglocked.

With this configuration, the child is se-cured also by the car seat belts and by theupper belts. To apply car seat belts tochild’s seat refer to the child’s seat hand-book.

fig. 17 F0C0139m

fig. 18 F0C0428m

In case of rear sliding seat,move the front seat forward

to a position from half its stroke forth.

WARNING

124

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SPRESETTING FORMOUNTING THE“UNIVERSAL ISOFIX” CHILD RESTRAINTSYSTEM

This car is preset for mounting the “Uni-versal Isofix” child restraint system, a newEuropean standardised system for carry-ing children safely.

The “Universal Isofix” child’s seat coversweight group: 1.

Due to its different anchoring system, theUniversal Isofix child’s seat shall be an-chored to the proper lower metal ringsA-fig. 19, set between rear seat back andcushion. The upper belt D-fig. 20 (pro-vided with the child’s seat) shall be thensecured to ring E set in the boot at child’sseat height.

It is possible to mount at the same timeboth the traditional restraint system andthe “Universal Isofix” one.

Remember that in case of Universal Isofixchild’s seat, you can only use all thoseseats approved with the marking ECER44/03 “Universal Isofix”.

At Lineaccessori Fiat is available the “Uni-versal Isofix” “Duo Plus” child’s seat.

For any further installation/use detail, re-fer to the “Instructions Manual” that mustbe provided by the child restraint systemManufacturer.

fig. 19 F0C0274m fig. 20 F0C0428m

Mount the child restraintsystem only with the car sta-

tionary. The child restraint system isproperly anchored to the mountingbrackets when clicks are heard. In anycase, keep to the installation instruc-tions that must be provided by thechild restraint system Manufacturer.

WARNING

125

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

S

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IL

IUF

IUF

IUF

Key

IUF = suitable for Isofix child restraint systems to be set facing forwards, universal class (fitted with third upper fastener), ap-proved for the weight group.

IL = suitable for Isofix type child restraint systems, specific and approved for this type of car: Kiddy Isofix seat available at Lin-eaccessori Fiat. The child’s seat can be installed by moving forward the front seat.

PASSENGER SEAT COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS ON UNIVERSAL ISOFIX CHILD’S SEAT USE

The table below, according to ECE 16 European Directive, shows the different installation possibilities of Universal Isofix restraintsystems on seats fitted with Isofix fasteners.

Range of weight Child’s seat orientation Isofix Isofix positionclass side rear

Group 0 to 10 kg

Group 0+ to 13 kg

Group I - 9 to 18 kg

Facing backwards

Facing backwards

Facing backwards

Facing backwards

Facing backwards

Facing backwards

Facing forwards

Facing forwards

Facing forwards

E

E

D

C

D

C

B

B1

A

126

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SFRONT AIR BAGS

The car is fitted with front multistage airbags (“Smart bag”) for driver and passen-ger, front side bags (where provided), rearside bags (where provided) and windowbags (where provided).

“SMART BAG” SYSTEM (FRONTMULTISTAGE AIR BAGS)

The front air bag (driver and passenger)has been designed to protect the occu-pants in the event of head-on crashes ofmedium-high severity, by placing the cush-ion between the occupant and the steer-ing wheel or dashboard.

Front air bags are designed to protectcar’s occupants in front crashes and there-fore non-activation in other types of col-lisions (side collisions, rear shunts, roll-overs, etc.) is not a system malfunction.

In case of front crash, an electronic con-trol unit, when required, triggers the in-flation of the cushion according to theseverity of the collision.

The cushion immediately inflates, placingitself as a protection between the bodyof the front occupants and the structurethat could cause injuries. Immediately af-ter, the cushion deflates.

The front air bag (driver and passenger) isnot a replacement of but complementaryto the use of belts, which should alwaysbe worn, as specified by law in Europe andmost non-European countries.

In case of crash, a person not wearing theseat belt moves forward and may come in-to contact with the cushion while it is stillinflating. Under this circumstance the pro-tection offered by the air bag is reduced.

Do not apply stickers or oth-er objects to the steering

wheel or to the air bag cover on thepassenger’s side or on the side rooflining. Do not put objects on thedashboard on passenger side (e.g. mo-bile phones) since they could interferewith proper passenger air bag infla-tion and cause injuries to the car’spassengers.

WARNING

Front air bag may not be activated in thefollowing situations:

❒ in collisions against highly deformableobjects not affecting the car front sur-face (e.g. bumper collision against guardrail);

❒ car wedging under other vehicles orprotective barriers (for example undera truck or guard rail);

as it offers no additional protection com-pared with the seat belts, consequently,it would be pointless. Therefore, failure tocome into action in the above circum-stances does not mean that the system isnot working properly.

127

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

S

DRIVER’S FRONT AIR BAG fig. 21

It consists of an instant-inflating cushioncontained in a special recess in the cen-tre of the steering wheel.

PASSENGER’S FRONT AIR BAGfig. 22

It consists of an instant-inflating cushioncontained into a special recess in thedashboard, this cushion has a volume big-ger than that of the driver.

The driver’s and passenger’s front air bagshave been designed and calibrated to im-prove the protection of a person wear-ing seat belts.

At their maximum inflation, their volumefills most of the space between the dash-board and the passenger.

fig. 21 F0C0051m fig. 22 F0C0112m

SERIOUS DANGER: Withpassenger’s air bag active,

never place child’s seats withthe cradle facing backwardssince the air bag activation

could cause to the child serious in-juries, even mortal. In the case ofneed, always deactivate the passen-ger’s air bag when a child’s seat isplaced on the front seat. The frontpassenger’s seat shall be adjusted inthe most backward position to pre-vent any contact between child’s seatand dashboard. Even if not compul-sory by law, you are recommended toreactivate the air bag immediately assoon as child transport is no longernecessary.

WARNING

128

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SMANUAL DEACTIVATION OFPASSENGER’S FRONT AIR BAG

Should it be absolutely necessary to car-ry a child on the front seat, the passenger’sfront air bag can be deactivated.

Deactivation/reactivation takes place withignition key at STOP, and operating it inthe special key switch on the right-handside of the dashboard. You can reach theswitch only if the door is opened.

When the door is open, the key can be in-serted and removed in both positions.

IMPORTANT Operate the switch onlywhen the engine is not running and the ig-nition key is removed.

The key-operated switch has two posi-tions fig. 23:

❒ Passenger’s front air bag activated (ONposition P): warning light F on in-strument panel off; it is absolutely pro-hibited to carry a child on the frontseat.

❒ Passenger’s front air bag deactivated(OFF position F): warning light Fon instrument panel on; it is possible tocarry a child protected by special re-straint system on the front seat.

The warning light F on the instrumentpanel stays on permanently until the pas-senger’s air bag is reactivated.

Deactivation of the passenger’s front airbag does not inhibit operation of the sidebag.

fig. 23 F0C0052m

129

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

S

The front passenger classifi-cation sensor could not de-

tect or correctly classify the occupantpresence because of the interpositionof cushions or sanitary aids (cushions,rubber rings, etc.), that thereforeshould not be used on the front pas-senger seat.

WARNING

Never place cutting or sharpobjects on the front passen-

ger seat to prevent damaging thefront passenger classification sensor.Contact a Fiat Dealership in case ofsensor damages.

WARNING

SERIOUS DANGER: Thefront passenger classification

sensor is not studied for therecognition of the children re-straints and for the conse-

quent automatic deactivation of thepassenger air bag. If you carry a chil-dren restraint on the front passengerseat, it is however necessary to de-activate the front passenger air bagthrough the proper deactivationswitch (see previous paragraph).

WARNING

Do not arrange heavy ob-jects on the front passenger

seat, because in the event of accident,the front passenger air bag intervenesif it is not deactivated through theproper deactivation switch (see pre-vious paragraph).

WARNING

FRONT PASSENGERCLASSIFICATION SENSOR(OCS = Occupant ClassificationSystem) (where provided)

The front passenger air bag is equippedwith a sensor, located inside the passen-ger seat between the padding and the ex-ternal cover of the seat, able to recognizethe presence of the occupant and classifyhis/her weight.

This allows ensuring the best protectionunder any circumstance, modulating theinflation pressure of the front passengerair bag as a function of the occupantweight.

If an adult sits on the front passenger seat,the relevant front air bag is ready to in-tervene in case of need. If the passengerseat is free, the air bag will not intervene.

IMPORTANT To receive the best systemprotection in the event of an accident, youhave to seat in proper position.

130

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SSIDE AIR BAGS (Side bag - Window bag)

SIDE BAG (where provided)

They are composed by two types of in-stant inflation cushions and are housed inthe back rests of the front seats fig. 24and in the side stuffing of the rear seats(where provided) fig. 25. The task of theside air bags is to increase protection ofthe occupants’ chest in the event of a sidecrash of medium-high severity.

WINDOW BAG (where provided)fig. 26

They consist of two “curtain” cushions lo-cated behind the side coverings of the roofand covered by proper finishings; this so-lution, studied for the head protection, al-lows offering the best protection to thefront and rear occupants in the event ofside crash, thanks to the wide cushion in-flation surface.

In minor side crashes (for which the re-straining action of the seat belts is suffi-cient), the air bags are not deployed.

Also in this case it is of vital importance towear the seat belts since in case of sidecrash they guarantee proper positioningof the occupant and prevent the occupantsto be pitched out of the car in case of vi-olent crashes.

Therefore the front and rear side bags(where provided) are not a replacementof but complementary to the belts, whichyou are recommended to always wear, asspecified by law in Europe and most non-European countries.

IMPORTANT In the event of side crash,you can obtain the best protection by thesystem keeping a correct position on theseat, allowing thus a correct window bagunfolding.

fig. 24 F0C0114m

fig. 25 F0C0133m

fig. 26 F0C0157m

131

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

S

IMPORTANT The front air bags and/orfront and rear side bags (if fitted) may bedeployed if the car is subject to heavyknocks or accidents involving the under-body area, such as for example violentshocks, against steps, kerbs or low obsta-cles, falling of the car in big holes or sagsin the road.

IMPORTANT When the airbag inflates itemits a small amount of dusts. These dustsare harmless and is not the beginning ofa fire; then the unfold cushion surface andthe car interiors can be covered by a dustyremains: this dust can irritate skin andeyes. In case of contact, wash yourself us-ing neutral soap and water.

IMPORTANT Should an accident occur inwhich any of the safety devices is activat-ed, take the car to a Fiat Dealership tohave the devices activated replaced and tohave the system checked.

Every control, repair and replacement op-erations concerning the air bags must on-ly be carried out c/o Fiat Dealership.

If you are having the car scrapped, havethe air bag system deactivated at a FiatDealership first. If the car changes own-ership, the new owner must be informedof the method of use of air bags and theabove warnings and also be given this“Owner Handbook”.

IMPORTANT The triggering of preten-sioners, front air bags and side bags (frontand rear) is decided in a differentiatedmanner by the electronic control unit, de-pending on the type of crash. The failureto deploy one or more of them does notmean that the system is not working prop-erly

Never rest head, arms andelbows on the door, on the

windows and in the window bag areato prevent possible injuries during in-flation phase.

WARNING

Never lean head, arms andelbows out of the window.

WARNING

Life and validity of pyrotech-nic charge and coil contact

are indicated on the label inside thelower oddment compartment. As thisdate approaches, contact Fiat Deal-ership to have them replaced.

WARNING

132

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

S

The key-operated switch has two posi-tions fig. 27:

❒ side air bag activated (ON positionÕ): warning light À on instrumentpanel off; it is absolutely prohibited tocarry a child on the rear seats;

❒ side air bag deactivated (OFF posi-tionÀ): warning light À on instru-ment panel on; it is possible to trans-port children protected by proper re-straints on the front seat.

fig. 27 F0C0154m

SERIOUS DANGER: In pres-ence of small size occupants

(children, etc.) on the rearseats, it is necessary to deac-tivate the rear side bags

through the apposite deactivationswitch located in the boot.

WARNINGMANUAL DEACTIVATION OF REAR SIDE BAGS (where provided)

Certain versions are fitted with rear sidebags (that can be deactivated) to protectthe chest of rear passengers.

For deactivation: operate the key switch(with ignition key) located in the boot un-der the rear shelves as shown in the fig-ure. The switch can be reached only withtailgate open.

IMPORTANT Operate the switch onlywhen the engine is stopped and the igni-tion key is removed.

133

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

S

Remember that with the keyengaged and at MAR, even

with the engine not running, the airbags may be triggered on a stationarycar if it is bumped by another movingcar. Therefore, never seat children onthe front seat even when the car isstationary. On the other hand, re-member that with the key at STOPno safety system (air bags or preten-sioners) is triggered in the event of animpact; in this case, failure to comeinto action cannot be considered as asign that the system is not workingproperly.

WARNINGGENERAL WARNINGS

If when turning the ignitionkey to MAR, the warning

light ¬ does not turn on or if it stayson when travelling (together with themessage on the display) there couldbe a failure in safety systems; in thisevent air bags or pretensioners couldnot trigger in case of impact or, in aminor number of cases, they couldtrigger accidentally. Contact FiatDealership immediately to have thesystem checked.

WARNING

Do not cover the backrest offront and rear seats with

trims or covers that are not suitableto be used with side bags.

WARNING

Never travel with objects onyour lap, in front of your

chest or with a pipe, pencil, etc. be-tween your lips; injury may result inthe event of the air bag being trig-gered.

WARNING

Always keep your hands onthe steering wheel rim when

driving, so that if the air bag is trig-gered, it can inflate without meetingany obstacles which could cause seri-ous harm to you. Do not drive withthe body bent forwards, keep the seatback rest in the erect position andlean your back well against it.

WARNING

If the car has been stolen oran attempt to steal it has

been made, if it has been subjected tovandals or floods, have the air bagsystem checked by Fiat Dealership.

WARNING

134

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SWhen the ignition key isturned to MAR, the warning

light F (with passenger’s front airbag deactivation switch at ON) turnson and flashes for few seconds to re-mind that the passenger’s air bag willbe deployed in a crash, after whichit should go off.

WARNING

When the ignition key isturned to MAR, the warning

light À (with the rear side bag de-activation switch at ON) turns on andflashes for few seconds to remind thatthe rear side bags will be deployed ina crash, after which it should go off.

WARNING

Do not wash the seat backrest with pressurised water

or steam (by hand or at automaticseat washing stations).

WARNING

The front air bag is triggeredfor shocks greater in magni-

tude than the pretensioners. For im-pacts between these two thresholds,it is therefore normal that only thepretensioners are triggered.

WARNING

Do not hook rigid objects tothe coat hooks and to the

support handles.

WARNING

The air bag does not substi-tute the seat belts, but only

increases their effectiveness. More-over, since the front air bags do notcome into operation in the event offront impact at low speed, side colli-sions, bumps from behind or over-turning, in these circumstances theoccupants would only be protectedby the seat belts which must thereforealways be fastened.

WARNING

135

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE C

AR

ENGINE STARTING ............................................................ 136

PARKING.................................................................................. 139

USING THE MANUAL GEARBOX .................................. 140

USING THE “SELESPEED” GEARBOX .......................... 141

CONTAINING RUNNING COSTS ................................. 149

TOWING TRAILERS............................................................. 151

SNOW TYRES......................................................................... 154

SNOW CHAINS..................................................................... 155

CAR INACTIVITY ................................................................. 156

CCOORRRREECCTT UUSSEE OOFF TTHHEE CCAARR

ENGINE STARTING

The car is fitted with an electronic enginelock device: if the engine fails to start, seethe paragraph “The Fiat CODE system” insection “Dashboard and controls”.

The engine may be noisier than usual dur-ing the first seconds of operation, espe-cially after it has not been used for a while.This characteristic feature of the hydraulictappet system does not compromise func-tionality or reliability. This timing systemfor petrol engines was adopted to limitservicing.

Engine starting is guaranteed up to a min-imum temperature of -18°C (Italy andMiddle Europe) and -20°C (North Eu-rope).

136

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE C

ARSTARTING PROCEDURE FORPETROL VERSIONS

Proceed as follows:

❒ pull up the handbrake;

❒ set the gear lever to neutral;

❒ press the clutch pedal down to thefloor without touching the accelerator;

❒ turn the ignition key to AVV and letit go the moment the engine starts.

If the engine does not start at the first at-tempt, return the ignition key to STOPbefore repeating starting.

If, when the ignition key is at MAR, warn-ing light Y remains lit together withwarning light U, turn the key to STOPand then back to MAR; if the warning lightremains on, try with the other keys pro-vided with the car.

We recommend that duringthe initial period you do notdrive to full car performance(e.g.: excessive acceleration,

long journeys at top speed, sharp brak-ing, etc.).

Running the engine in con-fined areas is extremely dan-

gerous. The engine consumes oxygenand produces carbon monoxidewhich is a highly toxic and lethal gas.

WARNING

When the engine is switchedoff never leave the ignition keyat MAR to prevent pointlesscurrent absorption from drain-

ing the battery.

If you are still unable to start the engine,perform the emergency start-up proce-dure (see “Emergency start-up” in section“In an emergency”) and contact Fiat Deal-ership.

IMPORTANT Never leave the ignition keyat MAR when the engine is off.

137

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE C

AR

STARTING PROCEDURE FOR DIESEL VERSIONS

Proceed as follows:

❒ pull up the handbrake;

❒ set the gear lever to neutral;

❒ turn the ignition key to MAR. Thewarning lights m and Y on the in-strument panel will turn on;

❒ wait for the warning lights Y and mto turn off. The hotter the engine is, thequicker this will happen;

❒ press the clutch pedal down to thefloor without touching the accelerator;

❒ turn the ignition key to AVV as soonas warning light m turns off. If youwait too long you will lose the benefitof the work done by the glow plugs. Re-lease the key as soon as the enginestarts.

IMPORTANT Never leave the ignition keyat MAR when the engine is off.

The warning light m willflash for 60 seconds at start-up or during prolonged crank-ing to signal a fault in the glow

plug heating system. You can use thecar as usual if the engine starts but youshould contact a Fiat Dealership assoon as possible.

IMPORTANT With cold engine, the ac-celerator pedal shall be completely re-leased while turning the ignition key toAVV.

If the engine does not start at the first at-tempt, return the ignition key to STOPbefore repeating starting.

If, when the ignition key is at MAR, warn-ing light Y on the instrument panel stayson, turn the key to STOP and then backto MAR; if the warning light remains on,try with the other keys provided with thecar.

If you still cannot start the engine, contactFiat Dealership.

138

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE C

ARSTOPPING THE ENGINE

Turn the ignition to STOP while the en-gine is idling.

IMPORTANT After a taxing drive, youshould allow the engine to “catch itsbreath” before turning it off by letting itidle to allow the temperature in the en-gine compartment to fall.

Never bump start the engineby pushing, towing or coastingdownhill as this could causefuel to flow into the catalytic

exhaust system and damage it beyondrepair.

Remember that the servo-brake and power steering

are not operational until the enginehas been started, therefore much ef-fort than usual is required on thebrake pedal and steering wheel.

WARNING

A quick burst on the acceler-ator before turning off the en-gine serves absolutely no prac-tical purpose, it wastes fuel

and is damaging especially to tur-bocharged engines.

HOW TO WARM UP THE ENGINE AFTER IT HAS JUST STARTED (petrol and diesel engines)

Proceed as follows:

❒Drive off slowly, letting the engine turnat medium revs. Do not accelerateabruptly;

❒Do not drive at full performance for theinitial kilometres. Wait until the coolanttemperature gauge starts moving.

EMERGENCY START-UP

If the instrument panel warning light Ystays on with fixed light, contact Fiat Deal-ership.

139

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE C

AR

PARKING THE CAR

Proceed as follows:

❒ Stop the engine and engage the hand-brake;

❒ Engage a gear (first if the car is faced up-hill or reverse if it is faced downhill) andleave the wheels steered.

Block the wheels with a wedge or a stoneif the car is parked on a steep slope. Donot leave the ignition key at MAR to pre-vent draining the battery. Always removethe key when you leave the car.

HANDBRAKE

The handbrake lever is located betweenthe two front seats.

Pull the handbrake lever upwards until thecar cannot be moved.

Four or five clicks are generally enoughwhen the car is on level ground while nineor ten may be required if the car is on asteep slope or laden.

IMPORTANT If this is not the case, con-tact Fiat Dealership to have the handbrakeadjusted.

In cars fitted with front armrest, lift thelatter so that it does not hinder the hand-brake engaging procedure.

When the handbrake lever is pulled upand the ignition key is at MAR, the in-strument panel warning light x will turnon.

To release the handbrake:

❒ slightly lift the handbrake and press re-lease button A-fig. 1;

❒ keep button A pressed and lower thelever. Warning light x will turn off.

Press the brake pedal when carrying outthis operation to prevent the car frommoving accidentally.

fig. 1 F0C0059m

Never leave children unat-tended in the car. Always re-

move the ignition key when leavingthe car and take it out with you.

WARNING

140

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE C

ARUSING THE MANUALGEARBOX

To engage the gears, press the clutch ped-al fully and shift the gear lever into one ofthe required positions (the diagram isshown on the knob fig. 2, fig. 3 and fig. 4).

To engage 6th gear (version 1.416V and 1.9Multijet16V) press the lever to the right toprevent engaging 4th gear by mistake. Asimilar action is required to shift downfrom 6th to 5th.

IMPORTANT The car can only be put in-to reverse gear when it has stopped mov-ing completely. With the engine running,before engaging the reverse, wait at least2 seconds with the clutch pedal fully downto prevent damage and grating of thegears.

To engage reverse R from neutral, lift thesliding ring A-fig. 2 or B-fig. 3 under theknob and shift the lever to the right and back(1.416V, 2.416V, 1.616V and Multijet versions).

For versions 1.816V just shift lever C-fig. 4to the right and back.

fig. 2 F0C0060m fig. 3 F0C0602m

fig. 4 F0C0310m

To change gears properlyyou must push the clutch

pedal fully down. It is therefore es-sential that there is nothing under thepedals: make sure the mats are lyingflat and do not get in the way of thepedals.

WARNING

Do not drive with your handresting on the gear lever as theforce exerted, even if slight,could lead over time to pre-

mature wear on the gearbox internalcomponents.

141

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE C

AR

USING THE“SELESPEED” GEARBOX(where provided)

The car may be fitted with a mechanicaltransmission with electronic control called“Selespeed”. This device includes a con-ventional mechanical gearbox to which anelectronically-operated electro-hydraulicdevice has been added which controls au-tomatically the clutch and gear engage-ment.

The car moves off using only the acceler-ator pedal.

To be able to use the Selespeed correct-ly, this chapter should be read in full.

OPERATION

The gearbox can work in two operatingmodes:

❒ the first mode is manual (MANUAL),the driver directly requests gearshift-ing;

❒ the second mode is automatic (AUTO),the system directly decides when shift-ing gear.

On versions fitted with Cruise Control,when activating it, the Selespeed gearboxwill automatically set in AUTO mode. Toselect the manual mode deactivate theCruise Control (see paragraph “CruiseControl” in section “Dashboard and con-trols”).

Manual mode (MANUAL)

In MANUAL mode, the display shows thegear engaged.

The requests to change gear may takeplace through:

❒ the gear lever A-fig. 5 on the centralconsole;

❒ the steering wheel controls fig. 6,which can be operated only when thecar speed exceeds 5 km/h.

It is not necessary to release the acceler-ator pedal when shifting gears.

Neutral (N) is accepted until the car speedexceeds 40 km/h. The reverse gear en-gagement (R) is accepted only if the caris stationary.

fig. 5 F0C0105m fig. 6 F0C0111m

142

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE C

AR

Such operating mode is set when, withAUTO mode selected, the button AUTOfig. 7 is pressed again, thereby excludingthe previously selected mode.

When downshifting, the engine is accel-erated automatically to bring it to thespeed necessary with the new gear ratio.

With the accelerator pedal pressed andgradual engine speed increase, gearshift-ing becomes quicker.

In the manual operating mode there arecertain automatic/security devices whichsimplify driving:

❒ when slowing down the clutch isopened and the transmission ratio is au-tomatically reduced to be ready forpicking up again; otherwise, when thecar is stopped, the gearbox will auto-matically be in first gear (1);

❒ requests to change gear that would takethe engine to exceed the maximumspeed or below minimum speed are notaccepted;

❒ nif the engine reaches the maximumpermissible speed and accelerating con-tinues (without the cutting in of theASR or ESP system), the system auto-matically engages a higher gear; ASR orESP system activation at max speed,gearshifting is inhibited;

❒ if jamming occurs during gear engage-ment, the system firstly tries to engagethe gear required again and, if it is stillnot possible, it automatically engagesthe immediately higher one to avoidleaving the car in neutral (N).

IMPORTANT It is advisable to wait for theend of a gear shifting operation before re-questing another one, to avoid multiple re-quests in rapid succession.

Automatic mode (AUTO)

This operating mode is selected by press-ing button AUTO, on the central console.

In the AUTO operating mode, AUTO isdisplayed followed by the indication of thegear selected.

Releasing the accelerator pedal quickly,the system does not engage a higher gearin order to maintain an adequate level ofengine brake.

The indication on the display of the gearselected, can be as follows:

N = neutral;

1 = first gear;

2 = second gear;

3 = third gear;

4 = fourth gear;

5 = fifth gear;

R = reverse;

fig. 7 F0C0010m

143

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE C

AR

SYSTEM ACTIVATION

Turning the ignition key to MAR, afterabout one second, the display shows thegear engaged (N, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, R): from thismoment onwards, the Selespeed systemaccepts gearshift commands.

IMPORTANT If after 10 seconds the dis-play does not show the gear engaged, turnthe ignition key to STOP, and wait for thedisplay to turn off, then repeat systemswitch on. If the fault persists, contact Fi-at Dealership.

IMPORTANT When the driver’s door isopened the system starts the hydraulicpart of the system to prepare it for whenthe engine is started.

MOVING-OFF

With the engine on and the car stationary,the gears that can be engaged for movingoff are only first (1), second (2) and/or re-verse (R).

To engage them it is possible, keeping thebrake pedal pressed, to use only thegearshift lever on the central console.

Moving off of the car is obtained releas-ing the brake pedal and gradually press-ing the accelerator pedal.

With the ASR system off (pressing theASR off button) moving off will be more“brilliant”.

IMPORTANT Reverse gear (R) can be en-gaged from any of the following othergears: neutral (N), first (1) or second (2)only when the car is stationary.

IMPORTANT If when shifting from re-verse (R) / first (1) or neutral (N) / first (1)sticking occurs on the first gear, the sys-tem automatically engages second gear (2).This is not to be considered as a fault asit is part of the operating logic. For thesame reason, in the case of sticking on re-verse gear, the system partially closes theclutch to allow gear engagement; in thiscase the engagement of reverse gear (R)will not be as smooth as usual.

After a request to shift gearwith the car stationary, be-

fore pressing the accelerator pedal tomake the car move, the driver mustalways check the display to see thatthe gear engaged is the one required.

WARNING

144

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE C

ARIMPORTANT NOTES

❒ With the car stopped and a gear en-gaged always keep the brake pedalpressed until deciding to move off;

❒ during prolonged halts with the enginerunning it is advisable to keep the gear-box in neutral;

❒ when the car is parked facing uphill, donot use the moving off manoeuvre tokeep the car still; use the brake pedaland press the accelerator pedal onlywhen the deciding to move off;

❒ use second gear (2) only when morecontrol is needed for moving off ma-noeuvres at low speed;

❒ if, in reverse gear, first (1) gear is en-gaged or vice versa, shift gear onlywhen the car is stopped completely andwith the brake pedal pressed.

Though highly inadvisable, if when travel-ling downhill for some unexpected reasonthe car is set to neutral (N), when the en-gagement of a gear is requested, the sys-tem automatically engages the best gear inrelation to the speed of the car to allowthe correct transmission of torque to thewheels.

When travelling downhill with a gear en-gaged and the accelerator released (if thecar is moving), beyond a pre-establishedspeed, the system engages the clutch au-tomatically to give the car adequate enginebraking.

GEARSHIFTING

Through lever

Gearshifting takes place through the con-trol lever A-fig. 8, which is of the float-ing type with a “single central stable po-sition”. It is possible to request an in-crease/decrease of the gear ratio engagedand/or reverse gear engagement (R) orneutral (N).

To request gearshifting proceed as followsfig. 9:

❒ shift upwards (+) push the lever for-wards. If the system is in neutral (N) orin reverse (R) moving the lever for-wards causes the engagement of firstgear (1);

❒ to shift downwards (-) push the leverbackwards.

fig. 8 F0C00105m fig. 9 F0C0184m

145

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE C

AR

IMPORTANT Before using the gearshiftcontrol lever, always check the gear en-gaged on the display (N, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, R).

With the engine off and the car stationaryit is possible to engage all the gears.

With the car stopped and the brake ped-al pressed, requests to change gear are ac-cepted only through the control lever onthe centre console.

From any gear (N, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5) and withthe car practically stationary, it is possi-ble to request the engagement of reversegear pushing the lever to the right andthen backwards fig. 10. If the car is mov-ing, the request is not accepted. Wait forthe car to stop and then request gear en-gagement again.

IMPORTANT Once a gear has beenchanged it is necessary to immediately re-lease the gearshift control lever after mak-ing the request. A manoeuvre prolonged(over 10 seconds) will cause the systemto switch automatically to AUTO; every-thing stops releasing the gearshift lever.

IMPORTANT When parking the car ona sloping road and engaging a gear to keepit braked, always check that the displayshows the new gear engaged and wait forone or two seconds before releasing thebrake pedal to allow complete engage-ment of the clutch.

Through steering wheel controls

They are placed on the steering wheelspokes fig. 11 through which, only withthe car on the move (with speed above 5Km/h), it is possible to shift gear up ordown.

If during operation in the automatic mode(AUTO) a request to change gear is made,this is performed without switching theoperating mode.

To allow setting to neutral (N), (with thecar stationary and brake pedal pressed),move the gearshift lever to the right fig. 12.


146

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE C

ARENGINE STARTING

The engine can be started either with agear engaged or with the gearbox in neu-tral (N).

After starting, the gearbox sets to neutralautomatically, the display shows the letterN and the system selects last operatingmode (MANUAL or AUTO) beforeswitching off.

IMPORTANT With gear engaged, fully de-press the brake pedal to allow enginestarting.

SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINEAND SYSTEM DEACTIVATION

Turning the ignition key to STOP the en-gine turns off.

The gear selected before switching off theengine remains engaged.

If the engine is stopped with the gearboxin neutral (N), letter N flashing on the dis-play calls the driver’s attention so that thecar can be put in safety conditions engag-ing first gear (1) or reverse (R).

In this case, the ignition key should beturned to MAR and, with the brake ped-al pressed, engage first gear (1) or reverse(R).

If the engine fails to startwith the gear engaged, the

driver is informed of the potentiallydangerous situation (due to the factthat the gearbox is in neutral) by thebuzzer.

WARNING

NEVER leave the car withthe gear in neutral (N).

WARNING

147

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE C

AR

FAILURE INDICATIONS

Failures of the Selespeed gearbox areshown by warning light t on the in-strument panel, together with the relevantmessage (see section “Warning lights andmessages”).

In case of system failure:

❒ a buzzer will sound;

❒ where provided, the AUTO mode willbe engaged automatically to make itpossible to reach the nearest Fiat Deal-ership and have the fault eliminated.

In the case of a fault, the system only al-lows the engagement of first gear (1), sec-ond gear (2) and reverse (R).

IMPORTANT If the engine is stopped withthe AUTO mode engaged, this will bestored by the system. Indeed, the nexttime the engine is started, this conditionwill still be active.

IMPORTANT Should the engine go offwith the car on the move, the next timeit is started the warning light Y maycome on. In this case check that the warn-ing light Y goes off turning the engine offand on again with the car stationary. If not,contact Fiat Dealership.

Never remove the ignitionkey when the car is moving.

In addition to the fact that the Sele-speed system would not work prop-erly up to stopping the car, the steer-ing wheel would lock automaticallythe first time it is turned.

WARNING

It is absolutely necessary toturn off the engine and then

turn off the Selespeed system keep-ing the brake pedal pressed: ONLYrelease the pedal when the display onthe instrument panel has gone out.

WARNING

In the event of a gearboxfault (to any component),

contact Fiat Dealership as soon aspossible to have the system checkedover.

WARNING

148

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE C

ARSTOPPING THE CAR

To stop the car, simply release the accel-erator pedal and, if necessary press thebrake pedal.

Regardless of the gear engaged and the op-erating mode activated (MANUAL or AU-TO) the system automatically disengagesthe clutch and shifts to a lower gear.

Stopping the car the system automatical-ly engages the first gear (1).

PARKING THE CAR

To park the car safely it is absolutely nec-essary to engage first gear (1) or reverse(R) and also the handbrake if the car is ona slope.

When turning off the engine with the caron an uphill slope and a gear engaged, itis absolutely necessary to wait for the dis-play showing the gear engaged to go offbefore releasing the brake pedal.

If the gearbox is in neutral (N) and want-ing to engage a parking gear, the systemshould be activated and with the foot onthe brake pedal it is necessary to engagefirst gear (1) or reverse (R).

TOWING THE CAR

See the instructions contained in para-graph “Towing the car” in section “In anemergency”.

BUZZER WARNINGS

The buzzer is activated when:

❒ reverse gear is engaged (R);

❒ clutch overheating occurs when mov-ing off (in this case it is necessary to“force” start-up without hesitation or,if the car is on a slope, release the ac-celerator and use the brake pedal tostop the car);

❒ an attempt is made to start the enginewith a gear engaged and the brake ped-al is not pressed completely;

Still for safety reasons, when the car is sta-tionary, with engine started gear engaged,the system activates the buzzer and au-tomatically shifts to neutral (N) when:

❒ no action is made on the acceleratorand/or brake pedal for at least 3 min-utes;

❒ the brake is pressed for over 10 min-utes;

❒ the driver’s door is opened and no ac-tion is made on the accelerator andbrake by at least 2 seconds;

❒ a gearbox failure has been detected.

149

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE C

AR

CONTAINING RUNNING COSTS

Here are some suggestions which mayhelp you to keep the running costs of yourcar down and lower the amount of toxicemissions released into the atmosphere.

GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS

Car maintenance

Have checks and adjustments carried outin accordance with the “Service schedule”.

Tyres

Check the pressure of the tyres routine-ly at an interval of no more than 4 weeks:if the pressure is too low, consumptionlevels increase as resistance to rolling ishigher.

Unnecessary loads

Do not travel with too much luggagestowed in the boot. The weight of the car(especially when driving in town) and itstrim greatly affects consumption and sta-bility.

Roof rack/ski rack

Remove the roof rack or the ski rack fromthe roof as soon as they are no longerused. These accessories lower air pene-tration and adversely affect consumptionlevels. When needing to carry particular-ly voluminous objects, preferably use atrailer.

Electric devices

Use electric devices only for the amountof time needed. Rear heated window, ad-ditional headlights, windscreen wipers andheater fan need a considerable amount ofenergy, therefore increasing the require-ment of current increases fuel consump-tion (up to +25% in the urban cycle).

Climate control

The air conditioner is an additional loadwhich greatly affects the engine leading tohigher consumption (on average up to+20%). When the temperature outsidethe car permits it, use the air vents wherepossible.

Spoilers

The use of non-certified aerodynamicitems may adversely affect air drag andconsumption levels.

150

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE C

ARTop speed

Fuel consumption considerably increaseswith speed. Avoid superfluous braking andaccelerating, which cost in terms of bothfuel and emissions.

Acceleration

Accelerating violently increasing the revswill greatly affect consumption and emis-sions: acceleration should be gradual andshould not exceed the maximum torque.

CONDITIONS OF USE

Cold starting

Short journeys and frequent cold starts donot allow the engine to reach optimumoperating temperature. This results in asignificant increase in consumption levels(from +15 to +30% on the urban cycle)and emission of harmful substances.

Traffic situations and roadconditions

Rather high consumption levels are tied tosituations with heavy traffic, for examplein queues with frequent use of the lowergears or in cities with many traffic lights.Also winding mountain roads and roughroad surfaces adversely affect consump-tion.

Traffic hold-ups

During prolonged hold-ups (traffic lights,level crossings) the engine should beswitched off.

DRIVING STYLE

Starting

Do not warm the engine with the car ata standstill or at idle or high speed: underthese conditions the engine warms upmuch more slowly, increasing electricalconsumption and emissions. It is thereforeadvisable to move off immediately, slow-ly, avoiding high speeds. This way the en-gine will warm faster.

Unnecessary actions

Avoid accelerating when waiting at trafficlights or before switching off the engine.This and also double declutching is ab-solutely pointless on modern cars and al-so increase consumption and pollution.

Gear selection

As soon as the conditions of the traffic androad allow, use a higher gear. Using a lowgear to obtain brilliant performance in-creases consumption.

In the same way improper use of a highgear increases consumption, emissions anengine wear.

151

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE C

AR

TOWING TRAILERS

IMPORTANT NOTES

For towing caravans or trailers the carmust be fitted with a certified tow hookand an adequate electric system. Installa-tion should be carried out by specialisedpersonnel who release a special documentfor circulation on the road.

Install any specific and/or additional rear-view mirrors as specified by law.

Remember that when towing a trailer,steep hills are harder to climb, the brak-ing spaces increase and overtaking takeslonger depending on the overall weight.

Engage a low gear when driving downhill,rather than constantly using the brake.

The weight the trailer exerts on the cartow hook reduces by the same amountthe actual car loading capacity. To makesure the maximum towable weight is notexceeded (given in the log book) accountshould be taken of the fully laden trailer,including accessories and personal be-longings.

Do not exceed the speed limits of thecountry you are driving in. In any case donot exceed 100 km/h.

INSTALLING THE TOW HOOK

The towing device should be fastened tothe body by specialised personnel ac-cording to any additional and/or integra-tive information supplied by the Manufac-turer of the device.

The ABS system with whichthe car may be fitted does

not control the trailer braking system.Drive with extreme care on slipperyroadbeds.

WARNING

Under no circumstancesshould the car brake system

be altered to control the trailer brake.The trailer braking system must befully independent of the car hydraulicsystem.

WARNING

152

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE C

ARThe towing device must meet current reg-ulations with reference to 94/20/EC Di-rective and subsequent amendments.

For any version the towing device usedmust match the towable weight of the caron which it is to be installed.

IMPORTANT Supplementary electricloads other than external lights (e.g. elec-tric brake, electric winch, etc.) shall beused with running engine.

Assembly diagram fig. 13-14

The tow hook structure must be fastenedin the points shown by the symbol Ø us-ing a total of 6 M10 screws.

Counterplates ➀ shall have a 4 mm minthickness.

Counterplates ➁ shall have a 6 mm minthickness.

The hook should be fastened to the bodyavoiding any type of drilling and trimmingof the rear bumpers that remains visiblewhen the hook is removed.

IMPORTANT It is compulsory to fasten alabel (plainly visible) of suitable size andmaterial with the following wording:

MAX LOAD ON BALL 60 kg

After fitting, screw holes shall be sealed toprevent exhaust gas inlet.

153

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE C

AR

F0C0249m F0C0434m

Exi

stin

gho

le

Standard tow ball

Exi

stin

gho

leE

xist

ing

hole

Rea

r ax

le

Exi

stin

gho

le

fig. 13 - Saloon versions fig. 14 - Multi Wagon versions

Full

load

Rea

r ax

le

Full

load

Standard tow ball

154

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE C

ARSNOW TYRES

Use snow tyres of the same size as thenormal tyres provided with the car.

Fiat Dealership will be glad to provide ad-vice concerning the most suitable type oftyre for the customer’s requirements.

For the type of tyre to be used, inflationpressures and the specifications of snowtyres, follow the instructions given in para-graph “Wheels” in section “Technicalspecifications”.

The winter features of these tyres are re-duced considerably when the tread depthis below 4 mm. In this case, they shouldbe replaced.

Due to the snow tyre features, under nor-mal conditions of use or on long motor-way journeys, the performance of thesetyres is lower than that of normal tyres. Itis therefore necessary to limit their use tothe purposes for which they are certified.

IMPORTANT When snow tyres are usedwith a max speed index below the onethat can be reached by the car (increasedby 5%), place a notice in the passengercompartment, plainly in the driver’s viewwhich states the max permissible speed ofthe snow tyres (as per EC Directive).

All four tyres should be the same (brandand track) to ensure greater safety whendriving and braking and better driveabili-ty.

Remember that it is inappropriate tochange the direction of rotation of tyres.

The max speed for snowtyres with “Q” marking is

160 km/h; 190 km/h for tyres with “T”marking and 210 km/h for tyres withH marking. The Road Traffic Codespeed limits must however be alwaysstrictly observed.

WARNING

Keep your speeddown when snowchains are fitted. Do

not exceed 50 Km/h. Avoidpotholes, steps and pavements andavoid also to drive for long distances onroads not covered with snow to preventdamaging the car and the roadbed.

155

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE C

AR

SNOW CHAINS

Use of snow chains should be in compli-ance with local regulations.

Snow chains should only be applied to thedriving wheels (front wheels).

Check the tension of the chains after thefirst few metres have been driven.

Use snow chains with reduced size: ontyres 195/65 R15” and 205/55 R16” usesnow chains with reduced size with maxprotrusion beyond the tyre profile of 9mm.

IMPORTANT Snow chains cannot be fit-ted to the space-saver spare wheel. So, ifa front (drive) wheel is punctured andchains are needed, a rear wheel should befitted to the front of the car and the sparewheel should be fitted to the rear.

This way with two normal drive wheels,snow chains can be fitted to them to solvean emergency.

IMPORTANT Snow chains may not beused on tyres type 215/45 R17 87W sinceinterference can be generated with thesurrounding components.

156

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF

THE C

ARCAR INACTIVITY

If the car is to be left inactive for longerthan a month, the following precautionsshould be noted:

❒ park the car in covered, dry and if pos-sible well-ventilated premises;

❒ engage a gear;

❒ check that the handbrake is not en-gaged;

❒ disconnect battery terminals (first dis-connect the negative terminal) andcheck the battery charge. This checkis to be repeated every three monthswhen the car is left inactive. Rechargeif the optical indicator shows a darkcolour without the central green area;

❒ clean and protect the painted parts us-ing protective wax;

❒ clean and protect the shiny metal partsusing special compounds readily avail-able.

❒ sprinkle talcum powder on the rubberwindscreen and rear window wiperblades and lift them off the glass;

❒ slightly open the windows;

❒ cover the car with a cloth or perforat-ed plastic sheet. Do not use sheets ofnon-perforated plastic as they do notallow moisture on the car body toevaporate;

❒ inflate tyres to +0,5 bar above the nor-mal specified pressure and check it atintervals;

❒ if you don’t disconnect the battery fromthe electric system, check its chargeevery month and recharge it if the op-tical indicator shows a dark colourwithout the central green area;

❒ do not drain the engine cooling system.

IMPORTANT Where relevant, switch offthe electronic car alarm with the remotecontrol.

157

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

GENERAL WARNINGS ...................................................... 158

LOW BRAKE FLUID.............................................................. 158

HANDBRAKE ON................................................................. 158

BRAKE PAD WEAR............................................................... 158

AIR BAG FAILURE ................................................................. 159

FRONT PASSENGER’S AIR BAG DEACTIVATED....... 159

REAR SIDE BAGS DEACTIVATED .................................. 160

SEAT BELTS NOT FASTENED........................................... 160

LOW BATTERY CHARGE .................................................. 160

LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE........................................... 161

EXHAUST OIL ....................................................................... 161

SELESPEED TRANSMISSION FAILURE............................ 161

“DUALDRIVE” ELECTRIC POWER STEERING FAILURE .................................................................................... 162

HIGH TEMPERATURE ENGINE COOLANT FLUID... 162

INCOMPLETE DOOR LOCKING..................................... 163

GENERIC FAILURE INDICATION .................................. 163

DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER CLOGGED................... 163

FUEL RESERVE......................................................................... 164

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM FAILURE (EOBD) ......... 164

ESP SYSTEM ............................................................................ 165

GLOW PLUG WARMING FAILURE................................ 165

GLOW PLUGS ........................................................................ 165

WATER IN DIESEL FUEL FILTER ...................................... 166

INEFFICIENT ABS SYSTEM ................................................. 166

INEFFICIENT EBD (ELECTRONIC BRAKING DISTRIBUTOR) .................. 166

CAR PROTECTION SYSTEM FAILURE - FIAT CODE.............................................................................. 167

ALARM FAILURE ................................................................... 167

BREAK-IN ATTEMPT ........................................................... 167

EXTERNAL LIGHT FAILURE .............................................. 167

REAR FOGLIGHTS ................................................................ 167

FRONT FOG LIGHTS........................................................... 167

LEFT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR ........................ 168

RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR .................... 168

SIDELIGHTS AND LOW BEAMS ...................................... 168

FOLLOW ME HOME ............................................................ 168

MAIN BEAMS........................................................................... 168

CRUISE CONTROL............................................................... 168

POSSIBLE PRESENCE OF ICE ON THE ROAD............ 168

LIMITED RANGE ................................................................... 168

ASR SYSTEM ........................................................................... 168

SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDED ................................................... 168

WWAARRNNIINNGG LLIIGGHHTTSS AANNDD MMEESSSSAAGGEESS

158

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

WARNING LIGHTSAND MESSAGES

GENERAL WARNINGS

Turning on of warning light is accompa-nied by specific message and/or by buzzersound where provided by instrument pan-el. These indications are concise andcautionary and shall not be consideredas exhaustive and/or as an alternative tothe specifications contained in this Own-er Handbook which shall always be readthrough carefully and thoroughly. In caseof failure indication always refer to thespecifications contained in this sec-tion.

IMPORTANT Failure indications displayedare divided into two categories: very se-rious and less serious failures.

Very serious failures are indicated by arepeated and prolonged warning “cycle”.

Less serious failures are indicated by alimited warning “cycle”.

The warning cycle of both failure classescan be stopped by pressing buttonMODE. The instrument panel warninglight will stay on until eliminating the fault.

Handbrake on

The warning light turns on when the hand-brake is on.

If the car is moving, a buzzer will alsosound.

IMPORTANT If the warning light turns onwhen travelling, check that the handbrakeis not engaged.

LOW BRAKEFLUID LEVEL (red)

HANDBRAKE ON (red)

Turning the ignition key to MAR thewarning light turns on, but it should go offafter few seconds.

Low brake fluid level

The warning light turns on when the lev-el of the brake fluid in the reservoir fallsbelow the minimum level, due to possi-ble leak in the circuit.

The display will show the dedicated mes-sage.

BRAKE PADWEAR (red)

The warning light turns on when thefront brake pads are worn; in this casehave them changed as soon as possible.


IMPORTANT Since the car is fitted withwear sensors for the front brake pads,when changing them, check also the rearbrake pads.

x

If the warning light x turnson when travelling (together

with the message on the display) stopthe car immediately and contact FiatDealership.

WARNING

d

FRONT PASSENGER’SAIR BAGDEACTIVATED (amber)

Warning light F will come on when de-activating the passenger front air bag. Withpassenger front air bag active, turning theignition key to MAR, warning light Fwillturn on with fixed light for about 4 sec-onds and then it will flash for other 4 sec-onds. It shall then go off.

159

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

AIR BAG FAILURE (red)

Turning the ignition key toMAR the warning light turns on,

but it should go off after few seconds.

The warning light stays on permanently ifthere is a failure in the air bag system. Thedisplay will show the dedicated message.

¬

If when turning the ignitionkey to MAR, the warning

light ¬ does not turn on or if it stayson when travelling (together with themessage on the display) there couldbe a failure in safety systems; in thisevent air bags or pretensioners couldnot trigger in case of impact or, in aminor number of cases, they couldtrigger accidentally. Contact FiatDealership immediately to have thesystem checked.

WARNING

The failure of the warninglight ¬ (warning light off) is

also indicated by the flashing formore than the normal 4 seconds ofthe passenger’s front air bag deacti-vated warning light F.

WARNINGF

Warning light F indicatesalso warning light ¬ failures.

This is indicated by intermittent flash-ing, over 4 seconds, of warning lightF. In this event warning light ¬ in-dicates that there could be a failurein safety systems. Contact Fiat Deal-ership immediately to have the sys-tem checked.

WARNING

160

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

REAR SIDE BAGSDEACTIVATED (where provided) (amber)

Warning light À turns on when rear sidebags are deactivated.

With rear side bags on, turning the igni-tion key to MAR, warning light À willturn on with fixed light for about 4 sec-onds and then it will flash for other 4 sec-onds. It shall then go off.

SEAT BELTS NOTFASTENED (red)

The warning light turns onglowing steadily with car station-

ary and driver’s seat belt not fastened cor-rectly. The warning light will turn on flash-ing together with the buzzer when, withcar moving, the driver’s seat belt is not fas-tened correctly.

The S.B.R. (Seat Belt Reminder) buzzercan only be excluded by Fiat Dealership.

The system can be reactivated through theset-up menu.

LOW BATTERYCHARGE (red)


but it should go out as soon as the engineis started (with the engine running at idlespeed a brief delay in going out is allowed).

If the warning light stays on glowing steadi-ly or flashing, contact immediately FiatDealership.

À < w

SELESPEEDTRANSMISSIONFAILURE (red)

Turning the ignition key to MARthe warning light turns on, but it should goout as soon as the engine is started.

The warning light with turn on flashing (to-gether with the message on the display)when there is a failure in the Selespeedtransmission.

t

161

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

LOW ENGINE OILPRESSURE (red)

EXHAUST OIL (red)(Multijet versions with DPF)

Low engine oil pressure

Turning the ignition key to MAR thewarning light turns on, but it should go outas soon as the engine is started.


v

In the event of Selespeedtransmission failure, go as

soon as possible to the nearest FiatDealership and have the systemchecked.

WARNING

Exhaust oil (Multijet versions with DPF)

The warning light with turn on flashingwhen the system detects that the engineoil is exhaust.

After the first indication, at each enginestarting the warning light v will go onflashing for about 1 minute and then every2 hours until oil is changed.


If the warning light v turnson when the car is travelling(together with the message onthe display), stop the engine

immediately and contact a Fiat Deal-ership.

If warning light v flashes,contact Fiat Dealership assoon as possible to have oilchanged and instrument pan-

el warning light turned off.

162

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

“DUALDRIVE”ELECTRIC POWERSTEERING FAILURE

(red)


If the warning light stays on, you will nothave steering assistance and the effort onthe steering wheel will be increased, steer-ing is however possible. Contact Fiat Deal-ership.


HIGH TEMPERATUREENGINE COOLANTFLUID (red)

Turning the ignition key to MARthe warning light turns on, but it should gooff after few seconds.

The warning light turns on when the en-gine is overheated.

If the warning light comes on when dri-ving, proceed as follows:

❒ normal driving conditions: stop thecar, switch off the engine and checkwhether the water level in the reser-voir is not below the MIN mark. Oth-erwise wait for few seconds to allowengine cooling, then open slowly andcarefully the cap, top up coolant andcheck whether its level is falling be-tween MIN and MAX marks in thereservoir. Check visually any leak and ifwhen restarting the warning lightcomes on again, contact a Fiat Dealer-ship.

❒ Car heavy duty (e.g.: towing traileruphill of fully laden car): decrease speed,if the warning light stays on, stop thecar. Wait for 2 or 3 minutes leaving theengine on and slightly accelerated tofurther activate the circulation of thecoolant fluid, then switch the engine off.Check proper coolant level as de-scribed previously.

IMPORTANT Under severe use of thecar, keep the engine on and slightly accel-erated for few minutes before switching itoff.


g ç

163

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INCOMPLETE DOORLOCKING (red)

The warning light turns onwhen one or more doors, the

boot or the bonnet are not properly shut.


The buzzer will sound when one or moredoors are open and the car is moving.

GENERIC FAILUREINDICATION (amber)

The warning light turns on in thefollowing circumstances.

Inertial fuel cut-off switchintervened

The warning light turns on when the in-ertial fuel cut-off switch is triggered. Thedisplay will show the dedicated message.

Sensor failure

The warning light turns on when a faultis detected to one of the following sensors(where provided):

❒ window anti-pinch sensors;

❒ engine oil pressure sensor;

❒ twilight sensor;

❒ rain sensor;

❒ parking sensors;

The display will show the dedicated mes-sage (excluding in the event of engine oilpressure sensor failure).

Contact Fiat Dealership as soon as possi-ble to have the fault removed.

´ èDIESEL PARTICULATEFILTER CLOGGED (amber) (Multijet versions)

The warning light turns on when the dieselparticulate filter is clogged and the drivingconditions do not enable to activate au-tomatically the reclaiming procedure.

To enable the cleaning procedure, keepthe car running until the warning lightturns off.


h

164

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

FUEL RESERVE (amber)



The warning light turns on when about 8litres fuel are left in the tank. The displaywill show the dedicated message.

IMPORTANT The warning light flashes toindicate a failure, contact Fiat Dealershipas soon as possible to have the systemchecked.

ENGINE CONTROLSYSTEM FAILURE(EOBD) (amber)

In normal conditions, turning theignition key to MAR, the warning lightturns on, but it should go off when the en-gine has started. The initial turning on in-dicates that the warning light is workingproperly. If the warning light stays on orturns on when travelling:

❒ glowing steadily: means a fault in the sup-ply/ignition system which could causehigh emissions at the exhaust, possiblelack of performance, poor handling andhigh consumption levels.


In these conditions it is possible to con-tinue driving without however requiringheavy effort or high speed from the en-gine. Prolonged use of the car with thewarning light on may cause damages. Con-tact Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.

ç U

If, turning the ignition key toMAR, the warning light Udoes not turn on or if it turnson glowing steadily or flashing

when travelling, contact Fiat Dealer-ship. Warning light U operation canbe checked by traffic agents by prop-er equipments, therefore comply withlaws and regulations of the countrywhere you are driving.

The warning light turns off if the fault dis-appears, but it is still stored by the system.

❒ flashing: indicates the possibility of dam-age to the catalyst (see “EOBD system”in section “Dashboard and controls”).

If the light flashes, it is necessary to releasethe accelerator pedal to lower the speedof the engine until the warning light stopsflashing; continue the journey at moder-ate speed, trying to avoid driving condi-tions that may cause further flashing andcontact Fiat Dealership as soon as possi-ble.

165

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

ESP SYSTEM (amber)

Turning the ignition key toMAR the warning light turns

on, but it should go off after fewseconds.

If the warning light does not turn off orstays on when travelling together with thebutton led ASR, contact Fiat Dealership.


Disconnecting the battery will make thewarning light turn on (together with themessage on the display) to indicate thatthe system shall be realigned. To make thewarning light turn off carry out the initial-isation procedure described at paragraph“ESP system” in section “Dashboard andcontrols”.

Warning light flashing when driving indi-cates that the ESP system is active.

GLOW PLUGWARMING FAILURE(Multijet versions)(amber)

GLOW PLUGS(Multijet versions) (amber)

Glow plug warming

Turning the ignition key to MAR thewarning light turns on and it will go offwhen glow plugs reach the preset tem-perature. Start the engine immediately af-ter warning light turning off.

IMPORTANT With hot ambient temper-ature, warning light stays on for very shorttime.

á mGlow plug warming failure

The warning light flashes when there is afailure in the glow plug warming system.Contact Fiat Dealership as soon as possi-ble.


INEFFICIENTEBD(ELECTRONICBRAKING

DISTRIBUTOR) (red) (amber)

The turning on at the same time of warn-ing lights x and > with the engine run-ning indicates an EBD system failure orthat the system is unavailable; in this caseheavy braking may cause the rear wheelsto lock before time, with the possibility ofskidding.

Drive with the utmost care to the near-est Fiat Dealership to have the systemchecked.


166

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

WATER IN DIESELFUEL FILTER (Multijet versions) (amber)


The warning light turns on when there iswater in the diesel fuel filter.


INEFFICIENT ABSSYSTEM (amber)



The warning light turns on when the sys-tem is inefficient or unavailable. In this casethe braking system keeps its effectivenessunchanged, but without the potential of-fered by the ABS system.

Caution is advisable and it is necessary tocontact Fiat Dealership.


c

The presence of water in thefuel circuit may cause seriousdamage to the entire injectionsystem and cause irregular en-

gine operation. If the warning light cturns on (together with the message onthe display), contact Fiat Dealership assoon as possible to have the system re-lieved. If the above indications come onimmediately after refuelling, water hasprobably been poured into the tank:turn the engine off immediately andcontact Fiat Dealership.

> x >

167

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR PROTECTIONSYSTEM FAILURE-FIATCODE (amber)

ALARM FAILURE(where provided) (amber)

BREAK-IN ATTEMPT (amber)

Car protection system failure

Turning the key to MAR the warning lightshall flash only once and then go off.

The turning on of the warning light glow-ing steadily, with the ignition key at MAR,indicates a probable failure (see “Fiat Codesystem” in section “Dashboard and con-trols”).

IMPORTANT The turning on at the sametime of the U and Y warning lights in-dicates a failure of the Fiat CODE system.

If with the engine running the warning lightY flashes (together with the message onthe display), this means that the car is notprotected by the engine immobilising de-vice (see “Fiat Code system” in section“Dashboard and controls”). Contact FiatDealership to have all the keys memo-rised.

Alarm failure (where provided)

The turning on of the warning light indi-cates a failure in the alarm system. Con-tact Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.


Break-in attempt

The turning on of the warning light indi-cates an attempt of break-in. Contact Fi-at Dealership as soon as possible.


EXTERNAL LIGHTFAILURE (amber)

The warning light turns onwhen one of the following lights

is failing:

❒ side/taillights

❒ brake lights or relevant fuse

❒ rear fog lights

❒ direction indicators

❒ number plate lights.

The failure referring to these lights couldbe: one or more blown bulbs, a blownprotection fuse or an electric connectioncut-off.


Y W

REAR FOG LIGHTS(amber)

The warning light turns onwhen the rear fog lights are

turned on.

4

FRONT FOG LIGHTS(green)

The warning light turns onwhen the front fog lights are

turned on.

5

168

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

LEFT-HAND DIRECTIONINDICATOR(green - intermittent)

The warning light turns on whenthe direction indicator stalk is moveddownwards or, together with the right in-dicator, when the hazard warning lightbutton is pressed.

RIGHT-HANDDIRECTION INDICATOR(green - intermittent)

The warning light turns on whenthe direction indicator stalk is moved up-wards or, together with the left indicator,when the hazard warning light button ispressed.

SIDELIGHTS ANDLOW BEAMS (green)

FOLLOW ME HOME

Side/taillights and low beams

The warning light turns on when side/tail-lights, parking lights or low beams areturned on.

MAIN BEAMS (blue)

The warning light turns onwhen the main beams are

turned on.

F

D

3

1

CRUISE CONTROL(where provided) (green)



The warning light turns on when turningthe Cruise Control knurled ring to ON.


Ü

POSSIBLE PRESENCE OF ICEON THE ROAD

The outside temperature indication startsflashing and symbol ❄ appears on the dis-play when the outside temperature reach-es or falls below 3°C to warn the driverof the possible presence of ice on theroad.


LIMITED RANGE

The display will show the dedicated mes-sage to warn the driver that the cruisingrange is less than 50 km.

ASR SYSTEM

The ASR system can be turned off bypressing the ASR button. The display willshow the dedicated message to warn thedriver that the system is off; at the sametime the button led will turn on.

Pressing again the ASR button will turn offthe button led and the display will showthe dedicated message to warn the dri-ver that the system is active again.

SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDED

The warning light turns on when the carexceeds the speed limit set previously (see“Multifunction Display” in section “Dash-board and controls”). The display willshow the dedicated message.

Follow me home

The warning light turns on when activat-ing the “Follow me home” device (see sec-tion “Dashboard and controls”). The dis-play will show the dedicated message.

169

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

ENGINE STARTING.............................................................. 170

IF A TYRE IS PUNCTURED ................................................ 171

QUICK TYRE REPAIR KIT FIX & GO automatic ......... 177

WHEN NEEDING TO CHANGE A BULB .................... 181

IF AN EXTERIOR LIGHT BURNS OUT .......................... 184

IF AN INTERIOR LIGHT BURNS OUT........................... 192

IF A FUSE BLOWS ................................................................. 196

IF THE BATTERY IS FLAT ................................................... 205

JACKING THE CAR .............................................................. 206

TOWING THE CAR ............................................................ 206

FIRE EXTINGUISHER ........................................................... 208

IINN AANN EEMMEERRGGEENNCCYY

170

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

ENGINE STARTING

JUMP STARTING

If the battery is flat, it is possible to startthe engine using an auxiliary battery withthe same capacity or a little higher thanthe flat one.

Proceed as follows fig. 1:

❒ Connect positive terminals (+ near theterminal) of the two batteries with ajump lead;

❒ With a second lead, connect the nega-tive terminal (–) of the auxiliary batteryand to an earthing point E on the en-gine or the gearbox of the car to bestarted;

❒ Start the engine;

❒ When the engine has been started, re-move the leads reversing the orderabove.

If after a few attempts the engine does notstart, do not insist but contact the near-est Fiat Dealership.

IMPORTANT Do not directly connect thenegative terminals of the two batteries:sparks could ignite the flammable gas fromthe battery. If the other battery is fitted inanother car, prevent accidental contactsbetween the metal parts of the two cars.

BUMP STARTING

Never bump start the engine (by pushing,towing, or coasting downhill) as this couldcause fuel to flow into the catalytic ex-haust system and damage it beyond repair.

IMPORTANT Remember that the servo-brake and electrical power steering sys-tem are not operating until the engine isstarted, a greater effort will therefore berequired to press the brake pedal or turnthe steering wheel.

fig. 1 F0C0194m

Under no circumstancesshould a battery charger beused to start the engine: itcould damage the electronic

systems and in particular the ignitionand injection control units.

Do not carry out this proce-dure if you lack experience;

if it is not done correctly it can causevery intense electrical discharges. Inaddition, the fluid contained in thebattery is poisonous and corrosive.Avoid contact with skin and eyes. Youare also advised not to put nakedflames or lighted cigarettes near thebattery and not to cause sparks.

WARNING

171

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

IF A TYRE IS PUNCTURED

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

Wheel changing and correct use of thejack and space-saver spare wheel call forsome precautions as listed below.

IMPORTANT If the car is fitted with “Fix& Go (quick tyre repair kit)”, see the rel-evant instructions in the following chap-ter.

Alert other drivers that thecar is stationary in compli-

ance with local regulations: hazardwarning lights, warning triangle, etc.Any passengers on board should leavethe car, especially if it is heavily laden.Passengers should stay away from on-coming traffic while the wheel is be-ing changed. If parked on a slope orrough surface, chock the wheels withwedges or other suitable devices toprevent the car from rolling.

WARNING

The space-saver spare wheel(where provided) is specific

to your car, do not use it on othermodels, or use the spare wheel of oth-er models on your car. The space-saver spare wheel shall only be usedin an emergency. It shall only be usedfor the distance necessary to reach aservice point and the car speed shallnot exceed 80 Km/h. The spare wheelhas an orange sticker that summaris-es the main cautions for use and lim-itations. The sticker should never beremoved or covered. Never fit a wheelcap on a space-saver spare wheel.The sticker gives the following infor-mation in four languages: caution! Fortemporary use only! 80 km/h max!Replace by normal wheel as soon aspossible. Do not cover this label.

WARNINGWhen driving with a space-saver spare wheel fitted, the

driving performance of the carchanges. Avoid accelerating or brak-ing sharply, abrupt turns or fast cor-nerings. The life of the spare wheelis approx. 3000 Km, after this dis-tance it should be replaced with an-other of the same type. Never at-tempt to fit a conventional tyre on arim designed for use as a space-saverspare wheel. Have the puncturedwheel repaired and refitted as soonas possible. Two or more space-saverspare wheels should never be used to-gether. Do not grease the threads ofbolts before installing them: theymight slip out.

WARNING

172

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

To change a wheel proceed as follows:

❒ Stop the car is a position that is notdangerous for oncoming traffic whereyou can change the wheel safely. Theground should be flat and adequatelyfirm; turn the engine off and pull up thehandbrake; engage first gear or reverse;use the handle A-fig. 2 to remove thepiece of stiff cover B (saloon versions)or C-fig. 3 (Multi Wagon versions);loosen the clamping device E-fig. 4;

fig. 2 F0C0084m

Please note:

❒ the jack weight is 1,76 kg; the jack re-quires no adjustment; the jack cannotbe repaired: if it breaks it must be re-placed with a new genuine jack; no toolother than its cranking device may befitted on the jack.

The jack shall only be usedfor changing wheels on the

car with which it is provided or oncars of the same model. It must notbe used for other purposes such as forinstance raising cars of other models.In no case should it be used for repairsunder the car. Incorrect positioningof the jack may cause the jacked carto fall. Do not use the jack for high-er capacities than stated on its label.Snow chains cannot be fitted to thespace-saver spare wheel. So, if a front(drive) wheel is punctured and chainsare needed, a rear wheel should befitted to the front of the car and thespare wheel should be fitted to therear. This way with two normal dri-ve wheels, snow chains can be fittedto them to solve an emergency.

WARNINGFasten the wheel cap cor-rectly to prevent the wheel

from coming free in motion. Nevertamper with the inflation valve. Nev-er place tools between the rim andtyre. Check and restore, if required,the pressure of tyres and spare wheelto the values given in section “Tech-nical specifications”.

WARNING

173

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

fig. 3 F0C0368m

fig. 4 F0C0392m

fig. 5 F0C03963m

❒ take out the tool container F-fig. 4 andtake it near to the wheel to be changed;take out the space-saver spare wheelG; remove the wheel cap H-fig. 5 (ver-sions with steel rims), or remove thewheel hub cap (versions with alloyrims);

174

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

❒ using the wrench provided L-fig. 6loosen the fastening bolts by about oneturn; if the car is fitted with alloy rims,shake the car to facilitate removing thisrim from the wheel hub;

❒ work the jack crank M-fig. 7 to extendit until the groove N on the upper partof the jack is correctly inserted on thelower profile P of the body in point Q(at approx. 72 cm from the front wheelcentre or 75 cm from rear wheel cen-tre);

❒ undo the wheel bolts and remove thewheel.

❒ make sure the contact surfaces be-tween spare wheel and hub are cleanso that the fastening bolts will not comeloose;

fig. 6 F0C0394m

fig. 7 F0M0395m

❒ warn anybody nearby that the car isabout to be lifted. They must stay clearand not touch the car until it is back onthe ground;

❒ fit the handle R-fig. 7 to operate thejack and raise the car until the wheelis a few centimetres from the ground;

175

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

❒ install the space-saver spare wheelmatching the holes S-fig. 8 with thecorresponding pins T;

❒ using the wrench provided, fully tight-en the four fastening bolts;

❒ work the jack handle R-fig.7 to lowerthe car and remove the jack;

❒ using the wrench provided, tighten upthe wheel bolts in a criss-cross fashionfollowing the sequence shown in fig. 9.

REFITTING THE STANDARDWHEEL

Following the procedure described previ-ously, raise the car and remove the sparewheel.

Versions with steel rims

Proceed as follows:

❒ Make sure the contact surfaces be-tween standard wheel and hub areclean so that the fastening bolts will notcome loose;

❒ Fit the normal wheel matching theholes S-fig. 8 with the correspondingpins T;

❒ Using the wrench provided, tighten thefastening bolts;

❒ Lower the car and remove the jack;

❒ Using the wrench provided, fully tight-en the bolts in the sequence shown infig. 9;

❒ Place the cap near the wheel so that theinflation valve can come through theslot provided on the cap;

❒ Press the circumference of the cap,starting from the parts nearest the in-flation valve until it is inserted com-pletely.

IMPORTANT Incorrect fitting may causethe wheel cap to come off when the car istravelling.

fig. 8 F0C0396m fig. 9 F0C0397m

176

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

Versions with alloy rims

Proceed as follows:

❒ Tighten the pin A-fig. 10 in one of thefastening bolt holes on the wheel hub;

❒ Insert the wheel on the pin and, usingthe wrench provided, tighten the fourbolts available. This is facilitated by theextension provided B;

❒ Loosen the pin A and tighten the lastfastening bolt;

❒ Lower the car and remove the jack;

❒ Using the wrench provided, fully tight-en the bolts in the sequence shownpreviously for the space-saver sparewheel (see fig. 9).

When you have finished

❒ Stow the space-saver spare wheel G-fig. 11 in the space provided in theboot;

❒ Insert the partially open jack into thecontainer F and force it slightly into itsseat so that it does not vibrate whenthe car is moving;

❒ Put the tools back into their places inthe container;

❒ Stow the container complete with toolson the spare wheel and secure every-thing with the clamping device E;

❒ Correctly reposition the boot stiff cov-er.

fig. 10 F0C0217m

fig. 11 F0C0392m

177

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

QUICK TYRE REPAIRKIT FIX & GOautomatic

The quick tyre repair kit Fix & Go auto-matic is located in the appropriate con-tainer in the boot .

The quick tyre repair kit includes fig. 12:

❒ bottle A containing sealer and fittedwith:

– filler hose B

– sticker C with caution “max. 80km/h”, to be affixed in a visible posi-tion for the driver (instrument panel)after repairing the tyre

❒ instruction brochure (see fig. 13), tobe used for prompt and proper use ofthe quick repair kit and to be thenhanded to the personnel charged withhandling the treated tyre

fig. 12 F0C0510m fig. 13 F0C0511m

Hand the instructionbrochure to the personnel

charged with treating the tyre re-paired with the kit.

WARNING

In the event of a puncturecaused by foreign bodies, it ispossible to repair tyres show-ing damages on the track or

shoulder up to max 4 mm diameter.

Holes and damages on thetyre side walls cannot be re-

paired. Do not use the quick tyre re-pair kit if damaging is due to runningwith flat tyre.

WARNING

❒ compressor D including gauge and con-nections

❒ a pair of protection gloves located inthe side space of the compressor

❒ adapters for inflating different elements.

178

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

IT SHOULD BE NOTICED THAT:

The sealing fluid of the quick tyre repairkit is effective with external temperaturesbetween –20 °C and +50 °C.

INFLATING PROCEDURE

The compressor shall not beoperated for more than 20

minutes. Risk of overheating!. Tyresrepaired with the quick tyre repair kitshall be used temporarily only.

WARNING

The cylinder contains ethyl-ene glycol. The cylinder con-

tains latex: it can cause allergic re-actions. It is harmful if ingested or in-haled and irritant for the eyes and incase of contact. In case of contactrinse immediately with water andtake off contaminated clothes. Ifswallowed, do not induce vomit, rinseout the mouth, drink a lot of waterand call the doctor immediately.Keep away from children. This prod-uct must not be used by asthmatics.Do not inhale vapours. Call the doc-tor immediately in case of allergic re-actions. Keep the cylinder in thespace provided for the purpose andfar from heat. The sealing fluid haslimited life. Replace the cylinder ifsealer has run out.

WARNING

fig. 14 F0C0513m

Put on the protection glovesprovided together with quick

tyre repair kit.

WARNING

❒ Pull up the handbrake. Loosen tyreinflation valve cap, take out the fillerhose A-fig. 14 and screw the ring nutB on the tyre valve;

Repairs are not possible incase of damages on the

wheel rim (bad groove distortioncausing air loss). Do not remove for-eign bodies (screws or nails) from thetyre.

WARNING

Do not throw away the cylin-der and the sealing fluid.Have the sealing fluid and thecylinder disposed of in com-

pliance with national and local regu-lations.

179

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

❒ make sure the compressor switch E-fig. 16 is set to 0 (off), start the en-gine and fit plug D-fig. 15 into the cig-ar lighter outlet and then turn on thecompressor by setting switch E-fig. 16to I (on). Inflate the tyre to the pres-sure specified in paragraph “Cold tyreinflation pressure” in section “Techni-cal Specifications”. Check tyre pressureon gauge F-fig. 16 with compressor offto obtain precise reading;

❒ If after 5 minutes it is still impossibleto reach at least 1.5 bar, disengage com-pressor from valve and current outlet,then move the car forth for approx. tenmetres in order to distribute the seal-ing fluid inside the tyre evenly, then re-peat the inflation operation;

❒ If after this operation it is still impossi-ble after 5 minutes to reach at least 1.8bar, do not start driving since the tyreis excessively damaged and the quicktyre repair kit cannot guarantee suit-able sealing, contact Fiat Dealership;

fig. 15 F0C0515m fig. 16 F0C0516m

Apply the sticker in a visibleposition for the driver to in-

dicate that the tyre has been treat-ed with the quick tyre repair kit. Dri-ve carefully especially when corner-ing. Do not exceed 80 km/h. Avoidheavy braking and accelerating.

WARNING

❒ after driving for about 10 minutes stopand check again the tyre pressure; pullup the handbrake;

If the pressure falls below 1.8bars, do not drive any fur-

ther: the quick tyre repair kit Fix & Goautomatic cannot guarantee properhold because the tyre is too muchdamaged. Contact Fiat Dealership.

WARNING

❒ If reaching the tyre pressure specifiedin paragraph “Cold tyre inflation pres-sure” in section “Technical Specifica-tions”, start driving immediately;

180

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

❒ if at least 1.8 bar pressure is read, re-store proper pressure (with enginerunning and handbrake on) and restart;

❒ drive with the utmost care to the near-est Fiat Dealership.

It is of vital importance tocommunicate that the tyre

has been repaired using the quick tyrerepair kit. Hand the instructionbrochure to the personnel chargedwith treating the tyre repaired withthe kit.

WARNINGFOR CHECKING ANDRESTORING PRESSURE ONLY

The compressor can be also used just forrestoring pressure. Disconnect the quickconnection and connect it directly to thetyre valve fig. 17; in this way the cylinderis not connected to compressor and thesealing fluid will not flow into the tyre.

CYLINDER REPLACEMENTPROCEDURE

To replace the cylinder proceed as fol-lows:

❒ disconnect connection B-fig. 18;

❒ turn counter-clockwise the cylinder toreplace and raise it;

❒ fit the new cylinder and turn it clock-wise;

❒ connect connection B to the cylinderand fit the transparent tube A into theproper space.

fig. 17 F0C0517m fig. 18 F0C0512m

181

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

WHEN NEEDING TOCHANGE A BULB

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

❒ When a light is not working, check thatthe corresponding fuse is intact beforechanging a bulb. For the location of fus-es, refer to the paragraph “If a fuseblows” in this section;

❒ Before changing a bulb check the con-tacts for oxidation;

❒ Burnt bulbs must be replaced by oth-ers of the same type and power;

❒ Always check the height of the head-light beam after changing a bulb.

Halogen bulbs must be han-dled touching only the metal-lic part. If the transparent bulbis touched with the fingers, its

lighting intensity is reduced and life ofthe bulb may be compromised. Iftouched accidentally, rub the bulb witha cloth moistened with alcohol and al-low to dry.

Modifications or repairs tothe electrical system (elec-

tronic control units) carried out in-correctly and without bearing the fea-tures of the system in mind can causemalfunctions with the risk of fire.

WARNING

Halogen bulbs contain pres-surised gas which, if broken,

may cause small fragments of glass tobe projected outwards.

WARNING

Due to high voltage, the bulbof (Xenon) gas-discharge

headlights must only be replaced byexperts: danger of death! Contact Fi-at Dealership.

WARNING

IMPORTANT The headlight inner surfacemay be lightly misted over: this is not afault but a natural fact due to low tem-perature and the level of air humidity. Itwill disappear as soon the headlights areturned on. The presence of drops insidethe headlights means water infiltration,therefore contact Fiat Dealership.

182

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

TYPES OF BULBS fig. 19

Various types of bulbs are fitted to yourcar:

A All glass bulbs: these are pressed on.Pull to remove.

B Bayonet type bulbs: press the bulb,turn counterclockwise to remove thistype of bulb from its holder.

F0C0391m

C Tubular bulbs: free them fromtheir contacts to remove.

D-E Halogen bulbs: to remove the bulb,release the clip holding the bulb inplace.

F Gas-discharge bulbs (Xenon).

fig. 19

183

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

ED D F A E B A B B B

B

B

B B A B B A C AC C CA C

H1 H7 H7

D2R W5W

H1 PY21W WY5W P21W W5W

P4/21W

P21/5W

P21W

R5W P21W

W2,3W P21W P21W W5W C5W W5WC5W C10W C5W W5W C5W

55W55W55W35W5W55W21W5W21W5W

4W/21W

21W/5W

21W

5W 21W2,3W21W21W5W5W5W5W10W5W5W5W

Bulbs Figure 19 Type Power

Main beam headlightsLonglife dipped beam headlights Dipped beam headlights Gas-discharge low beam headlights (where provided) Front sidelights (2 per headlight) longlife Front fog lights (where provided)Front direction indicators Side direction indicators Rear direction indicators Taillights (3-door versions) Taillights/Rear fog lights (5-door versions)Taillights/Brake lights (Multi Wagon versions) Taillights (Multi Wagon versions) (side fixed light unit)Taillights (Multi Wagon versions) (tailgate light unit)Brake lights (3-door versions) Third brake light (additional brake light) Reversing light Rear fog lights Number plate light (saloon versions) Number plate light (Multi Wagon versions) Puddle/door lightsFront roof light Rear roof light (where provided)Glovebox light Boot light Courtesy mirror light (where provided)

184

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

IF AN EXTERIOR LIGHTBURNS OUT

For the type of bulb and power rating, see“When needing to change a bulb”.

FRONT LIGHT UNITS fig. 20-21

The front light units contain the sidelights,dipped beam, main beam, direction indi-cator and front fog light bulbs.

The bulbs are arranged inside the light unitas follows:

A direction indicators / fog lights (whereprovided)/sidelights / dipped beamheadlights

B sidelights / main beam headlights.

To change the bulbs of the sidelights, di-rection indicators, low beams and foglights it is necessary to remove the coverC releasing the catch D.

To change the bulbs of main beams andsidelights, remove the cover E operatingthe device F.

fig. 20 F0C0435m fig. 21 F0C0436m

After replacement, refit thecovers correctly checking thatthey are properly secured.

185

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS fig. 22

Gas-filled filament lamps

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:

❒ remove the protective cover releasingthe catch;

❒ release the bulb holder catch A;

❒ disconnect the electric connector B;remove the bulb C and replace it;

Gas-discharge lamps (Xenon)(where provided)

MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS fig. 23




❒ disconnect the electric connector B;remove the bulb C and replace it;

❒ fit the new bulb, making the tabs of themetallic part coincide with the grooveson the reflector, reconnect the electri-cal connector B then hook the bulbholder catch A;

❒ refit the protective cover correctly.

fig. 22 F0C0178m fig. 23 F0C0179m

Due to high voltage, the bulbof (Xenon) gas-discharge

headlights must only be replaced byexperts: danger of death! Contact Fi-at Dealership.

WARNING



186

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

DIRECTION INDICATORS

Front fig. 24



❒ turn the bulb holder A counterclock-wise and remove it;

❒ remove the bulb B pushing it gently andturning counterclockwise;

❒ replace the bulb and then refit the bulbholder turning it clockwise, checkingthat it is secured correctly;


Side fig. 25


❒ push the transparent cover A towardscar running direction to compress thecatch;

❒ remove the unit;

❒ turn the bulb holder B counterclock-wise, remove the snap-fitted bulb C andreplace it;

❒ refit the bulb holder B in the transpar-ent cover, then position the unit mak-ing sure the catch clicks into place.

FRONT FOG LIGHTS (where provided) fig. 26




❒ disconnect the electric connector B;

❒ remove the bulb C and replace it;




187

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

FRONT SIDELIGHTS

To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:

❒ remove the protective cover A and C-fig. 27 releasing catch B and D re-spectively;

❒ using the extension A-fig. 28 or D-fig. 29, turn the bulb holder B-fig. 28or E-fig. 29 clockwise and counter-clockwise and then withdraw it;

❒ remove the bulb C-fig. 28 or F-fig. 29and replace it;

❒ refit the bulb holder making sure thecatch clicks into place; also check theproper bulb positioning looking at thelamp from outside;


REAR LIGHT UNITS (saloon versions)


❒ open the tailgate;

❒ from inside the boot, withdraw theconnector A-fig. 30, loosen the 3 nutsB with the extension (where provided)used to tighten the wheel bolts (sup-plied with the tool kit) and remove thelight unit.

IMPORTANT When subwoofer is locat-ed on the left side of the boot, to replacethe rear light cluster contact Fiat Dealer-ship.


fig. 30 F0C0208m

188

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

3-door versions


❒ press lamp holder catches A-fig. 31outwards and remove it;

❒ remove bulbs slightly pushing them andturning counterclockwise.


B: taillights;

C: direction indicators;

D: rear fog lights;

E: reversing lights;

F: taillights.

fig. 31 F0C0181m fig. 32 F0C0182m

5-door versions


❒ unloose the 4 screws A-fig. 32 and re-move the bulb holder;



B: taillights;

C: direction indicators;

D: taillights/rear fog lights;

E: reversing lights.

189

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

REAR LIGHT UNITS (Multi Wagon versions)

Tailgate light unit



❒ push down cover A-fig. 33 and re-move electric connectorB-fig. 34;

fig. 33 F0C0425m

❒ push the bulb holder side tabs A-fig. 35 inwards to remove it;


fig. 34 F0C0426m fig. 35 F0C0417m


B: taillights;

C: reversing lights;

D: rear fog lights.

190

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY


Side fixed light unit



❒ turn the handle A-fig. 36 to open thedoor B;

❒ hold the tongue C-fig. 37 and open thedoor for the rear light unit access;

❒ remove the electric connector D;

❒ push the bulb holder side tabs A-fig. 38 inwards to remove it;



B: taillights/brake lights;

C: direction indicators.

191

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

ADDITIONAL BRAKING LIGHT(THIRD STOP)

IMPORTANT To replace the additionalbraking lights (third stop) contact a FiatDealership.

NUMBER PLATE LIGHTS

Saloon versions fig. 39


❒ work in the points shown by the arrowand slacken the 2 cover fasteningscrews A;

❒ change the bulb B releasing it from theside contacts and making sure the newbulb is correctly fastened between thecontacts;

❒ refit the cover.

fig. 39 F0C0411m fig. 40 F0C0367m

Multi Wagon versions fig. 40


❒ use the screwdriver supplied with thecar to remove the transparent cover Aas shown in the figure;

❒ change the bulb B releasing it from theside contacts and making sure the newbulb is correctly fastened between thecontacts;

❒ refit the transparent cover.

192

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

IF AN INTERIOR LIGHTBURNS OUT

For the type of bulb and power rating, see“When needing to change a bulb”.

FRONT CEILING LIGHT

Versions without Skywindowsunroof


❒ press the catches A-fig. 41 and with-draw the plastic cover B;

❒ slacken the 2 fastening screws A-fig. 42, then turn the 2 bulb holders Bcounterclockwise;

❒ remove the bulbs and replace them. Toreplace bulb C-fig. 42, release it fromthe side contacts making sure that thenew bulb is correctly clamped betweenthe contacts.

Versions with Skywindow sunroof

To change the bulbs, proceed as follows:

❒ remove the front ceiling light A-fig. 43 pressing the plastic cover asshown by the arrows

❒ disconnect electric connectors B-fig. 44 and C;

fig. 41 F0C0201m

fig. 42 F0C0202m

fig. 43 F0C0253m

fig. 44 F0C0398m

193

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

❒ slacken the 2 fastening screws A-fig. 45, then turn the 2 bulb holders Bcounterclockwise, remove the bulbsand replace them. To replace bulb C,release it from the side contacts mak-ing sure that the new bulb is correctlyclamped between the contacts.

REAR CEILING LIGHT (where provided)

Versions without Skywindowsunroof


❒ remove the light unit A-fig. 46 lever-ing in the points shown by the arrows(on retaining tabs);

❒ replace the bulbs B releasing them fromthe side contacts making sure that thenew bulb is correctly clamped betweenthe contacts.

Versions with Skywindow sunroof

Versions with Skywindow sunroof are fit-ted with two rear ceiling lights.

To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:

❒ using the screwdriver provided in thekit, remove the cover A-fig. 47 in thepoint shown by the arrow;

❒ replace the bulb B-fig. 48 releasing itfrom the side contacts making sure thatthe new bulb is correctly clamped be-tween the contacts.

fig. 45 F0C0202m

fig. 46 F0C0204m

fig. 47 F0C0227m fig. 48 F0C0229m

194

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

COURTESY MIRROR LIGHT(where provided)


❒ open the mirror cover A-fig. 49;

❒ remove the bulb B levering in thepoints shown by the arrows;

GLOVEBOX LIGHT fig. 51


❒ open the glovebox, then remove thelight unit A;

❒ replace the bulb B releasing it from theside contacts making sure that the newbulb is correctly clamped between thecontacts.


❒ replace the bulb C-fig. 50 releasingit from the side contacts making surethat the new bulb is correctlyclamped between the contacts.

195

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

BOOT LIGHT



❒ remove the bulb A-fig. 52 levering inthe points shown by the arrow.

❒ open the protection B-fig. 53 and re-place the snap-fitted bulb;

❒ re-close the protective cover B on thelens;


❒ refit the light unit A-fig. 52 insertingit in its correct position firstly on oneend and then on the other until it clicksinto place.

PUDDLE / DOOR LIGHTS fig. 54


❒ open the door and remove the trans-parent cover A levering in the pointshown by the arrow;

❒ open the protection B and replace thesnap-fitted bulb;

❒ re-close the protective cover B on thetransparent cover A.

196

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

If a general fuse (MEGA-FUSE, MIDI-FUSE, MAXI-

FUSE) cuts in, do not attempt any re-pair and contact a Fiat Dealership.Before replacing a fuse, make surethe ignition key has been removedand that all the other services areswitched off and/or disengaged.

WARNING

If a fuse blows again, contacta Fiat Dealership.

WARNING

IF A FUSE BLOWS

GENERAL

The fuse is a protective device for theelectric system: it comes into action (i.e.it cuts off) mainly due to a fault or im-proper action on the system.

When a device does not work, check theefficiency of its fuse: the conductor ele-ment A- fig. 55 must be intact. If not, re-place the fuse with one of the same amprating (same colour).

B: undamaged fuse

C: fuse with damaged filament.

To replace a fuse, use the pliers D hookedto the fusebox on the dashboard.

Never replace a fuse withmetal wires or anything else.

fig. 55 F0C0220m

Never replace a fuse withanother with a higher amp

rating, DANGER OF FIRE.

WARNING

197

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

FUSE LOCATION

Fuses are grouped into four fuse boxes, tobe found respectively on the dashboard,on the battery positive pole, next to thebattery and in the boot (left-hand side).

Certain versions are also fitted with a sin-gle fuse set inside the engine compartmentfuse box.

fig. 57 F0C0266m

fig. 56 F0C0193m

Fuse box on the dashboard fig. 57

To gain access to the fuses in the fuse boxon the dashboard, open lid A-fig. 56.

198

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

Fuse box next to the battery fig. 59

To gain access to the fuse box and to thesingle fuse next to the battery, press theretainers A-fig. 58 and remove the pro-tection cover B.

fig. 59 F0C0151m

fig. 58 F0C0498m

199

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

Fuse box on the battery positivepole fig. 61

To gain access to the fuses in the fuse boxon the battery positive pole press the re-tainers A-fig. 60 and remove the protec-tion cover B.

fig. 61 F0C0152m

fig. 60 F0C0499m

200

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

Fuse box in the boot fig. 65

Saloon versions

To gain access to the fuses in the fuse boxon the left side of the boot, open lid A-fig. 62 as shown in the figure.


To gain access to the fuses in the fuse boxon the left side of the boot, proceed as fol-lows:

❒ turn the knob A-fig. 63 and open thelid B;

❒ hold the tab C-fig. 64 to open the sec-ond lid D and gain access to the fusebox.


fig. 65 F0C0531m

201

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

FUSE SUMMARY TABLE

LIGHTS

Right dipped beam headlight

Left dipped beam headlight

Right main beam headlight

Left main beam headlight

Front fog lights

Brake light/third stop light

Reversing light

Front/rear ceiling light/s

Door/puddle lights

+30 rear fog lights

RH/LH headlight fuse boxes (versions with gas-discharge headlights)

COMPONENTS

Selespeed transmission pump (2.420V versions)

Ignition switch

Headlight aiming device

Climate control compressor

Anti-pollution sensor (versions with automatic two-zone climate control system)/headlight washer relay coil/ Body Computer/Climate control system fan

Powered door mirrors control (movement, ideograph lighting)

FIGURE

57

57

59

59

59

57

57

57

57

57

57

FIGURE

59

59

57

59

57

57

FUSE

F12

F13

F14

F15

F30

F37

F31

F32

F32

F53

F37

FUSE

F05 (MAXI-FUSE)

F03 (MAXI-FUSE)

F13

F19

F31

F51

AMPERE

15

15

10

10

15

7.5

7.5

10

10

7.5

7.5

AMPERE

30

20

15

7.5

7.5

7.5

202

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

COMPONENTS

+ 30 Sound system/Connect-Navigator/Heating-climate control unit/EOBD system diagnostic socket/Volumetric-antiraising sensors/Alarm siren/Bluetooth system control unit

Rear window wiper seat warming relay coil

Left rear power window

Right rear power window

Rear heated window

Windscreen wiper/washer/rear window washer

Passenger compartment current outlet (saloon versions)/Current outlet (MultiWagon versions)/Cigar lighter

Door mirror demisting device/heated window nozzles

Cruise Control

Electric power steering control unit

Engine compartment control unit

Dashboard control unit

+30 door electronic control unit (door lock actuators, dead lock, boot, rear heated window)/Trailer control unit, if any

Free

Headlight washer

Primary services (electronic injection)

Secondary services (electronic injection)

Water in diesel fuel filter sensor (Multijet versions)/flow meter (Multijet versions)

FUSE

F39

F52

F33

F34

F40

F43

F44

F41

F35

F02 (MAXI-FUSE)

F70 (MEGA-FUSE)

F71 (MIDI-FUSE)

F36

F38

F09

F17

F11

F35

AMPERE

10

15

20

20

30

30

20

7.5

7.5

70

150

70

20

–

20

10

15

7.5

FIGURE

57

57

57

57

57

57

57

57

57

59

61

61

57

57

59

59

59

57

203

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

COMPONENTS

Front power window on driver side

Front power window on passenger side

Signal from switch on brake pedal for electronic control units

Instrument panel (key-operated positive)

Instrument panel (+30)

ABS / ASR / ESP control unit (yawing sensor with ESP)

ABS / ASR / ESP control unit

Air bag control unit/OCS sensor (versions with rear side bags)

+30 Electronic injection system

Dashboard control unit

Climate control fan

Radiator fan (low speed - versions 1.416V, 1.616V, 1.816V, Multijet)

Radiator fan (high speed - versions 1.416V, 1.616V, 1.816V, Multijet)

Fan and radiator (versions 2.420V)

Horn

Fuel pump

Electronic injection primary services (petrol versions)

FUSE

F47

F48

F35

F37

F53

F42

F01 (MAXI-FUSE)

F50

F18

F72 (MIDI-FUSE)

F08 (MAXI-FUSE)

F06 (MAXI-FUSE)

F07 (MAXI-FUSE)

F06 (MAXI-FUSE)

F10

F21

F22

AMPERE

20

20

7.5

7.5

7.5

7.5

60

7.5

7.5

60

30

30

50

60

15

15

15

FIGURE

57

57

57

57

57

57

59

57

59

61

59

59

59

59

59

59

59

204

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

COMPONENTS

Electronic injection system/Selespeed system (2.4 20V versions)/Radiator fan control unit(2.4 20V versions) (key-operated positive)

Skywindow sunroof curtain

Skywindow sunroof

Additional heater (Multijet versions)

Glow plug warming (Multijet versions)

Free

Electronic injection primary services (Multijet versions)

+30 Selespeed

Electric power steering (key-operated positive)

Radio external amplifier

Driver’s seat warming

Front passenger’s seat warming

Steering wheel controls, Connect/Navigator, Parking sensors, Rain/daylight sensor, Central console control panel, Heating/climate control unit, Bluetooth system control unit, Ideograph lighting, Set of switches for light control andmenu access-setting, Volumetric and antiraising sensor deactivation buttons, Front ceiling light, Sunroof controls (key-operated positive)

FUSE

F16

F45

F46

F73 (MIDI-FUSE)

F04 (MAXI-FUSE)

F20

F22

F23

F24

F54

F57

F67

F49

AMPERE

7.5

20

20

50

50

–

20

15

7.5

25

10

10

7.5

FIGURE

59

57

57

61

59

59

59

59

59

65

65

65

57

205

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

IF THE BATTERY IS FLAT

IMPORTANT The battery charging pro-cedure is described only for informationpurposes. This operation should be car-ried out by Fiat Dealership.

Charging should be slow at a low amp rat-ing for 24 hours. Charging for a longertime may damage the battery.

Charge the battery as follows:

❒ disconnect battery negative terminal;

❒ connect the charger cables to the bat-tery terminals, observing the poles;

❒ turn on the charger;

❒ when you have finished, turn the charg-er off before disconnecting the battery;

❒ reconnect battery negative terminal.

IMPORTANT Where relevant, switch theelectronic car alarm off with remote con-trol (see “Alarm” in section “Dashboardand controls”).

The liquid contained in thebattery is poisonous and cor-

rosive. Avoid contact with the skin oreyes. The battery should be chargedin a well ventilated place, away fromnaked flames or possible sources ofsparks: danger of explosion and fire.

WARNING

Do not attempt to charge afrozen battery: it must first-

ly be thawed, otherwise it may burst.If freezing has occurred, the batteryshould be checked by skilled person-nel to make sure that the internal el-ements are not damaged and that thebody is not cracked, with the risk ofleaking poisonous and corrosive acid.

WARNING

TOWING THE CAR

The tow ring provided with the car ishoused in the tool box under the bootmat.

TOW RING HOOKING

Proceed as follows:

❒ release the cap operating the tab A-fig. 67-68;

❒ take the tow hook B from its support;

❒ tighten the ring on the rear or frontthreaded pin.

fig. 66 F0C0247m

206

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

JACKING THE CAR

If the car is to be lifted, go to a Fiat Deal-ership which is equipped with the armhoist or workshop lift.

Jack up the car only by positioning the jackarms or the shop jack in the points shownin fig. 66.

207

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

fig. 67 F0C0384m

fig. 68 F0C0387m

TOWING SELESPEEDVERSIONS

For versions with Selespeed gearbox,make sure that it is in neutral N checkingthat the car moves when pushed) and pro-ceed as for towing a normal car with me-chanical gearbox following the instructionsgiven previously.

If setting to neutral is not possible, do nottow the car. Contact a Fiat Dealership.

Before starting to tow, turnthe ignition key to MAR and

then to STOP. Do not remove thekey. If the key is removed, the steer-ing lock engages automatically re-sulting in the impossibility to steer thewheels.

WARNING

When towing, rememberthat without the help of the

servobrake and power steering, agreater effort is required on the ped-al and steering wheel. Do not useflexible cables for towing and avoidjerks. During towing operations makesure that fastening the joint to the cardoes not damage the components incontact with it. When towing the car,you must comply with the specifictraffic regulations regarding the towring and how to tow on the road.

WARNING

Do not start the enginewhen towing the car.

WARNING

208

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

IINDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

FIRE EXTINGUISHER (where provided)

It is located on the right side of the boot;position varies according to 3 fig. 69 or5-door versions fig. 70.

The fire extinguisher has a reference mark(5p❚ for 5-door versions or 3p❚ for 3-door versions) for the extinguisher cor-rect positioning on the retaining bracket. fig. 69 F0C0331m

fig. 70 F0C0343m

fig. 71 F0C0344m

To use the fire extinguisher, proceed asfollows: release the catch A-fig. 71 andopen the tabs B.

IMPORTANT In addition to the fire ex-tinguisher, it is also wise to keep a first-aidkit and a blanket in the car.

209

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING .................................................. 210

SERVICE SCHEDULE............................................................. 211

ANNUAL INSPECTION SCHEDULE............................... 213

ADDITIONAL CHECKS....................................................... 213

CHECKING FLUID LEVELS................................................. 216

AIR FILTER .............................................................................. 225

POLLEN FILTER ..................................................................... 225

DIESEL FUEL FILTER ............................................................ 225

BATTERY.................................................................................. 226

WHEELS AND TYRES .......................................................... 229

RUBBER HOSES...................................................................... 230

WINDSCREEN/REAR WINDOW WIPERS.................... 231

BODYWORK.......................................................................... 233

INTERIORS ............................................................................. 235

CCCCAAAARRRR MMMMAAAAIIIINNNNTTTTEEEENNNNAAAANNNNCCCCEEEE

IMPORTANT The Scheduled Servicingcoupons are specified by the Manufactur-er. The failure to have them carried outmay invalidate the warranty.

Scheduled Servicing is performed by all Fi-at Dealership, at pre-established times.

If during each operation, in addition to theones programmed, the need arises for fur-ther replacements or repairs, these maybe carried out only with the explicit agree-ment of the Customer.

IMPORTANT You are advised to contactFiat Dealership in the event of any minoroperating faults, without waiting for thenext service coupon.

If your car is used frequently for towing,the interval between one service couponand the other must be reduced.

SCHEDULED SERVICING

Correct maintenance is essential for en-suring long car life under the best condi-tions.

This is why Fiat has programmed a seriesof checks and maintenance operationsevery 30.000 km.

It is however important to remember thatscheduled servicing does not completelycover all the car’s requirements: also inthe initial period before 30.000 km servicecoupon and later, between one couponand another, ordinary care is still requiredsuch as for example routine check andtopping up the level of fluids, tyre pressurecheck, etc...

210

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

211

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

SERVICE SCHEDULE

30 60 90 120 150 180

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ●

● ●

● ●

● ● ●

●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

Thousands of km

Check tyre conditions/wear andadjust pressure if required

Check light system operation (headlights, direction indicators, hazard lights, boot lights, passenger compartment lights, glovebox lights, warning lights, etc.)Check windscreen wiper/washer operation, adjust nozzles if requiredCheck windscreen/rear window blade position/wearCheck front disk brake pad conditions and wearand wear indicator operationCheck rear disk brake pad conditions and wearSight inspect the conditions of: body external parts, underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel - brakes), rubber parts (boots, sleeves, bushes, etc.)Check cleanness of locks, bonnet and boot and lever cleanness, and lubricationCheck and top up, if required, fluid levels (brakes/hydraulic clutch, windscreen/rear window washer, battery, engine coolant, etc.) Check and adjust handbrake lever stroke, if requiredSight inspect accessory drive belt conditions (excluding 1.616V version)Sight inspect accessory drive belt conditions (1.616V version)Check and adjust tappet clearance (1.9 Multijet 8V version)Check and adjust tappet clearance (1.6 16V only version)Check exhaust emissions (petrol versions)Check exhaust emissions/smoke (Multijet versions)

212

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

30 60 90 120 150 180

● ●

● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

●

●

●

●

● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

Thousands of km

Check timing belt conditions (1.616V excluding version)Check timing belt conditions (1.616V version)Check engine control system operation (through diagnostic socket)Replace accessory drive belt/s (excluding 1.616V version)Replace accessory drive belt/s (1.616V version)Replace timing belt (excluding Multijet and 1.616V versions) (*)Replace timing belt (Multijet and 1.616V versions) (*)Change spark plugs (1.616V version)Change spark plugs (petrol versions - excluding 1.616V)Replace diesel fuel filter (Multijet versions)Replace air cleaner cartridgeChange engine oil and oil filter (petrol versions) (or every year)Change engine oil and oil filter (Multijet versions without DPF) (or every 2 years)Change engine oil and oil filter (Multijet versions with DPF) (**)Change brake fluid (or every 2 years)Change pollen filter (or every year)

(*) Regardless of the km covered, the timing belt shall be replaced every 3 years for particularly demanding use (cold climates, driving in thecity, idling for a long time) or in any case every 5 years

(**) Engine oil and oil filter shall be changed when the relevant warning light/message on the display turn on and in any case every 2 years.

213

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

ANNUAL INSPECTIONSCHEDULE

For cars with an annual mileage of below30.000 km (for example about 15.000 km)the following yearly inspection programmeis advised:

❒ check tyre conditions/wear and adjustpressure if required (including thespace-saver spare wheel);

❒ check light system operation (head-lights, direction indicators, hazard lights,boot lights, passenger compartmentlights, glovebox light, warning lights,etc.);

❒ check windscreen wiper/washer oper-ation, adjust nozzles;

❒ check windscreen/rear window bladeposition/wear;

❒ check front disk brake pad conditionsand wear;

❒ sight inspect the conditions of: engine,gearbox, transmission, pipes and hoses(exhaust - fuel - brakes), rubber parts(boots, sleeves, bushes, etc.) fuel andbrake system hoses;

❒ check cleanness of bonnet and bootlocks, and lever cleanness and lubrica-tion

❒ check battery charge (by optical depthgauge);

❒ visual check on various drive belt con-ditions;

❒ check and top up fluid levels (enginecoolant, brakes, windscreen washer,battery, etc.);

❒ change engine oil and oil filter, if re-quired (Multijet versions);

❒ replace pollen filter.

ADDITIONAL CHECKS

Every 1,000 km or before long journeys,check and top up if required:

❒ engine coolant fluid level;

❒ brake fluid level;

❒ windscreen washer fluid level;

❒ tyre pressure and conditions.

Every 3,000 km check and top up if re-quired: engine oil level.

You are recommended to use FL Sele-nia products, designed and producedspecifically for Fiat cars (see table “Ca-pacities” in section “Technical specifica-tions”).

214

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

IMPORTANT - Engine oil (petrol and Multijet versionswithout DPF)

Should prevailing use of the car be underone of the following specially heavy con-ditions:

❒ trailer or caravan towing;

❒ dusty roads;

❒ short distances (less than 7-8 km) re-peated and with external temperaturesbelow zero;

❒ frequently idling engines or long dis-tance low speed driving (e.g. taxis ordoor-to-door deliveries) or in case ofa long term inactivity;

replace engine oil more frequently thanrequired on “Service schedule”.

IMPORTANT - Engine oil (Multijet versions with DPF)

Engine oil and oil filter shall be changedwhen the relevant warning light, togeth-er with the message on the display, turnon (see section “Warning lights and mes-sages”) or in any case every 2 years.

Should prevailing use of the car be in thecity, engine oil will waste faster.

Oil topping up, even signifi-cant ones, do not replace theengine oil change procedurerequired when warning light

v turns on. Engine oil shall bechanged at a Fiat Dealership that willalso turn off the warning light on theinstrument panel.

IMPORTANT - Air cleaner

If the car is used on dusty roads changethe air cleaner more frequently than theindications in the “Service schedule”.

If in doubt as to how often the engine oiland air cleaner should be changed ac-cording to how you use the car, contacta Fiat Dealership.

215

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

IMPORTANT - Battery

The charge in the battery should bechecked at the start of winter to limit therisk of electrolyte freezing.

This check should be carried out morefrequently if the car is used mainly forshort trips, or if it is fitted with accessoriesthat permanently absorb electricity evenwith the ignition key removed, especiallyin the case of after market accessories. Ifthe car is used in hot climates or particu-larly harsh conditions it is wise to checkthe level of the battery fluid (electrolyte)more frequently than specified in the “Ser-vice schedule”.

IMPORTANT - Pollen filter

If the car is used frequently in dusty orheavily polluted environments it is advis-able to replace the filtering element morefrequently; in particular it should be re-placed if a reduction of the amount of airadmitted to the passenger compartmentis noted.

IMPORTANT - Diesel filter

The possibility of topping up with dieselfuel not complying with EN590 EuropeanNorm might make it necessary to replacethe filter more frequently than indicatedin the “Service Schedule”.

Car maintenance should beentrusted to Fiat Dealership.For routine and minor main-tenance operations you wish

to carry out yourself, always make sureyou have the proper equipment, gen-uine Fiat spare parts and the necessaryfluids; do not however carry out theseoperations if you have no experience.

216

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

CHECKING FLUIDLEVELS

IMPORTANT When topping up take carenot to confuse the various types of fluids:they are all incompatible with one anoth-er and could seriously damage the car.

IMPORTANT Never smoke while work-ing in the engine compartment; gas and in-flammable vapours may be present, withthe risk of fire.

1 Engine oil - 2 Battery - 3 Brake fluid -4 Windscreen/rear window/headlightwasher fluid - 5 Engine coolant

F0C0500mfig. 1 - 1.416V version

F0C0518mfig. 2 - 1.616V version

217

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

1 Engine oil - 2 Battery - 3 Brake fluid - 4 Windscreen/rear window/headlightwasher fluid - 5 Engine coolant - 6 Sele-speed transmission oil (where provided)

fig. 3 - 1.816V version

fig. 4 - 2.420V version

1 Engine oil - 2 Battery - 3 Brake fluid - 4 Windscreen/rear window/headlightwasher fluid - 5 Engine coolant

F0C0502m

F0C0503m

218

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE



fig. 6 - 1.9 Multijet 16V versions

F0C0504mfig. 5 - 1.9 Multijet 8V versions

F0C0505m

219

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

ENGINE OIL fig. 7-8-9-10-11-12

Checking engine oil

Check the oil level a few minutes (about5) after the engine has stopped, with thecar parked on level ground.

Remove the dipstick A and clean it, putit back in completely, remove it and checkthat the level is within the MIN and MAXmarks on the dipstick. The interval be-tween the MIN and MAX marks corre-sponds to about one litre of oil.

fig. 7 - 1.416V version F0C0103m

Topping up engine oil

If the oil level is near or even below theMIN mark, add oil through the filler neckB, until reaching the MAX mark.

Oil level shall never exceed the MAXmark.

IMPORTANT If a routine check revealsthat the oil level is above the MAX mark,contact Fiat Dealership to have the cor-rect level restored.

IMPORTANT After adding or changingthe oil, let the engine turn over for a fewseconds and wait a few minutes after turn-ing it off before you check the level.

fig. 8 - 1.816V version F0C0519m fig. 9 - 1.9 Multijet 8V version F0C0122m

220

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

fig. 10 - 1.616V version F0C0231m fig. 11 - 2.420V version F0C0115m fig. 12 - 1.9 Multijet 16V version F0C0470m

Engine oil consumption

Max engine oil consumption is usually 400grams every 1000 km.

When the car is new, the engine needsto run in, therefore the engine oil con-sumption can only be considered stabilisedafter the first 5000 - 6000 km.

IMPORTANT The oil consumption de-pends on driving style and the conditionsunder which the car is used.

IMPORTANT Do not add oil with speci-fications other than that already in the en-gine.

When the engine is hot, takecare when working inside the

engine compartment to avoid burns.Remember that when the engine ishot, the fan may cut in: danger of in-jury. Scarves, ties and other looseclothing might be pulled by movingparts.

WARNING

Used engine oil and filter con-tain harmful substances forthe environment. Contact Fi-at Dealership to have the oil

and filter changed.

221

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

❒ if the oil is below the MAX mark, topup to reach the correct level;

❒ after refitting the cap, insert thebreather tube firmly on the cap spoutand turn the ignition key to STOP.

IMPORTANT Do not add oil into the cir-cuit tank having different specificationsfrom that already existing.

fig. 13 F0C0121m

Used gearbox oil containsdangerous substances for theenvironment. For changingthe oil we advise contacting

Fiat Dealership, which is equipped fordisposing of used oil respecting the na-ture and the law.

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM OIL FORACTUATING SELESPEEDGEARBOX (where provided) fig. 13

The oil should be checked with the car ona level surface and with the engine stoppedand cold.

To check the level, proceed as follows:

❒ turn the ignition key to MAR;

❒ disconnect the breather tube and re-move the cap A checking that the lev-el corresponds with the MAX mark onthe reservoir;

222

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

ENGINE COOLANT FLUID fig. 14-15-16

The coolant level shall be checked withcold engine and shall not be lower thanthe MIN mark on the reservoir.

If the level is low, pour slowly a mixtureof 50% distilled water and 50% PARAFLUUP of the FL Selenia through the fillerneck A.

A 50-50 mixture of PARAFLU UP anddistilled water gives freeze protection to–35°C.

fig. 14 - 1.416V version F0C0520m fig. 15 - 1.416V - 1.816V - 2.420V version

F0C0108m fig. 16 - 1.9 Multijet version F0C0469m

The cooling system usesPARAFLU UP antifreeze. Donot add fluid having differentspecifications from that al-

ready existing. PARAFLU UP cannotbe mixed with other types of fluids.Should other fluids be added, do notstart the engine and contact Fiat Deal-ership as soon as possible.

Do not remove the reservoircap when the engine is hot:

you risk scalding yourself. The cool-ing system is pressurised. If necessary,replace the cap only with anothergenuine one, otherwise system effi-ciency could be compromised.

WARNING

223

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

WINDSCREEN/REARWINDOW/HEADLIGHTWASHER FLUID fig. 17-18

To top up, open the cap A and then poura mixture of water and TUTELA PRO-FESSIONAL SC 35, in the followingconcentrations:

❒ 30% TUTELA PROFESSIONALSC 35 and 70% water in summer;

❒ 50% TUTELA PROFESSIONALSC 35 and 50% water in winter.

fig. 17 F0C0106m fig. 18 - 1.9 Multijet version F0C0468m

Do not travel with the wind-screen washer reservoir emp-

ty. The windscreen washer is funda-mental for improving visibility.

WARNING

Certain commercial addi-tives for windscreen washers

are inflammable. The engine com-partment contains hot componentswhich may set it on fire.

WARNINGIn case of temperatures below –20°C, useundiluted TUTELA PROFESSIONALSC 35 fluid.

Check level through the reservoir.

For versions fitted with headlight wash-er, remove the filter and the relevant dip-stick. Use the dipstick to check the fluidlevel inside the reservoir.

224

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

Prevent brake fluid, which ishighly corrosive, from cominginto contact with paintedparts. Should it happen, im-

mediately wash with water.

Brake fluid is poisonous andhighly corrosive. In the event

of accidental contact, wash the partsinvolved immediately with neutralsoap and water, then rinse thor-oughly. Call the doctor immediatelyif the fluid is swallowed.

WARNING

Symbol π on the containerindicates synthetic brake flu-

id, distinguishing it from the mineralkind. Using mineral fluids irreversiblydamages the special braking systemrubber seals.

WARNING

BRAKE FLUID fig. 19

Unscrew cap A and check that the fluidlevel in the reservoir is at maximum.

Fluid level in the reservoir shall not exceedthe MAX mark.

If fluid has to be added, it is suggested touse the brake fluid in table "Fluids and lu-bricants" (see chapter "Technical charac-teristics").

NOTE Clean accurately the tank cap Aand the surrounding surface.

fig. 19 F0C0098m

At plug opening, pay maximum attentionin order to prevent any impurities fromentering the tank.

For topping up, always use a funnel withintegrated filter with mesh equal to orlower than 0.12 mm.

IMPORTANT Brake fluid absorbs mois-ture. For this reason, if the car is mainlyused in areas with a high degree of at-mospheric humidity, the fluid should bereplaced at more frequent intervals thanspecified in the “Service schedule”.

225

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

AIR FILTER

Air filter replacement shall be carried outat a Fiat Dealership.

POLLEN FILTER

Pollen filter replacement shall be carriedout at a Fiat Dealership.

DIESEL FUEL FILTER

DRAINING THE CONDENSE (Multijet versions)

IMPORTANT The presence of water inthe fuel circuit can severely damage thewhole injection system and make the en-gine misfire. If the warning light c turnson (together with the message on the dis-play), contact a Fiat Dealership as soonas possible to have the bleeding operationcarried out.

The liquid in the battery ispoisonous and corrosive.

Avoid contact with eyes and skin. Donot bring naked flames or possiblesources of sparks near the battery:risk of fire and explosion.

WARNING

Running the battery withlow fluid level can damage

the battery beyond repair and couldalso cause its explosion.

WARNING

226

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

BATTERY

The battery is of the “Limited mainte-nance” type: under normal conditions ofuse the electrolyte does not need toppingup with distilled water.

Contact Fiat Dealership to have the bat-tery checked/replaced.

CHECKING THE CHARGE fig. 20

The battery charge may be checkedthrough the indicator A (where required)set on the battery cover and acting ac-cording to the colour the indicatorshows.

Should the battery be not fitted with bat-tery charge inspection device (optical elec-trolyte indicator), inspection operationsshall be carried out by skilled personnelonly.

Refer to the table below or to the labelB on the battery.

fig. 20 F0C0506m

Bright white colour

Dark colour without green area in the centre

Dark colour with green area in the centre

Top up electrolyte

Low charge level

Electrolyte level and charge sufficient

ContactFiat Dealership

Charge the battery (advisable to contact FiatDealership)

No action

227

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

CHANGING THE BATTERY

If required, replace the battery with a gen-uine spare part having the same specifi-cations.

If a battery with different specifications isfitted, the service intervals given in the“Service schedule” in this section will nolonger be valid.

Refer to the instructions provided by thebattery manufacturer.

Incorrect fitting of electricaland electronic accessories canseriously damage the car. If af-ter buying the car, you want

to install electric accessories which re-quire permanent electric supply(alarm, free-hand phone kit, etc.) con-tact Fiat Dealership whose qualifiedpersonnel, in addition to suggesting themost suitable devices, will evaluate theoverall electric absorption, checkingwhether the car electric system is ca-pable of withstanding the load re-quired, or whether it should be inte-grated with a more powerful battery.

USEFUL ADVICE FOR LENGTHENING THE LIFEOF YOUR BATTERY

To avoid draining your battery and length-en its life, observe the following indica-tions:

❒ when you park the car, ensure thedoors, tailgate and bonnet are closedproperly;

❒ the ceiling lights must be off. The caris however provided with an automat-ic system for switching off internallights;

❒ do not keep accessories (e.g.: soundsystem, hazard lights, etc.) switched onfor a long time when the engine is notrunning;

❒ before performing any operation on theelectrical system, disconnect the bat-tery negative cable;

❒ battery terminals shall always be per-fectly tightened.

Batteries contain substancesthat are very harmful for theenvironment. You are advisedto have the battery changed

at a Fiat Dealership, which is properlyequipped for disposing of used batter-ies respecting nature and the law.

If the car is left inactive forlong periods at cold, remove

the battery and store it in a warmplace to prevent freezing.

WARNING

When working on the bat-tery or near it, always wear

the proper goggles.

WARNING

228

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

IMPORTANT A battery which is kept ata charge of less than 50% (optical indica-tor with dark colour without green areain the middle) for any length of time willbe damaged by sulphation leading to a re-duction in cranking power.

Moreover, this might lead to a higher riskof the battery electrolyte freezing (thismay even occur at -10°C). If the car is in-active for a long period of time, refer to“Car inactivity”, in section “Correct useof the car”.

In fact, since these devices continue ab-sorbing energy even when the ignition keyis off, they gradually run down the battery.

The total intake of these systems (facto-ry and after-market) must be less than 0,6mA x Ah (of the battery) as shown in thefollowing table:

Battery

40 Ah

50 Ah

60 Ah

If after buying the car, you want to installelectric accessories which require per-manent electric supply (alarm, etc.) con-tact Fiat Dealership whose qualified per-sonnel, in addition to suggesting the mostsuitable devices, will evaluate the overallelectric absorption, checking whether thecar’s electric system is capable of with-standing the load required, or whether itshould be integrated with a more power-ful battery.

Maximum admitted

stand-by intake

24 mA

30 mA

36 mA

229

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

WHEELS AND TYRES

Check the pressure of each tyre, includ-ing the spare, every two weeks and beforelong journeys. The pressure should bechecked with the tyre rested and cold.

For the correct tyre inflation pressure, see“Wheels” in “Technical specifications”section.

Incorrect pressure causes abnormal tyrewear fig. 21:

A: normal pressure: tread evenly worn.

B: low pressure: tread particularly wornat the edges.

C: high pressure: tread particularly wornin the centre.

Tyres must be replaced when the treadwears down to 1.6 mm. In any case, com-ply with the laws in the country where thecar is being driven.

IMPORTANT NOTES

❒ As far as possible, avoid sharp brakingand screech starts, etc. Be careful notto hit the kerb, potholes or other ob-stacles hard. Driving for long stretch-es over bumpy roads can damage thetyres;

❒ Periodically check that the tyres haveno cuts in the side wall, abnormalswelling or irregular tyre wear. If any ofthese occur, have the car seen to at aFiat Dealership;

❒ avoid overloading the car when travel-ling: this may cause serious damage tothe wheels and tyres;

fig. 21 F0C0101m

❒ if a tyre is punctured, stop immediate-ly and charge it to avoid damage to thetyre, the rim, suspensions and steeringsystem;

❒ Tyres age even if they are not usedmuch. Cracks in the tread rubber area sign of ageing. In any case, if the tyreshave been on the car for over 6 years,they should be checked by specialisedpersonnel, to see if they can still beused. Also remember to check thespace-saver spare wheel;

❒ In the case of replacement, always fitnew tyres, avoiding those of dubiousorigin;

❒ If a tyre is changed, also change the in-flation valve;

❒ To allow even wear between the frontand rear tyres, it is advisable to changethem over every 10-15 thousand kilo-metres, keeping them on the same sideof the car so as to not reverse the di-rection of rotation.

230

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

RUBBER HOSES

As far as the brake system and fuel rubberhoses are concerned, carefully follow the“Service schedule” in this section.

Indeed ozone, high temperatures and pro-longed lack of fluid in the system maycause hardening and cracking of the hoses,with possible leaks. Careful control istherefore necessary.

Remember that road holdingdepends also on the correct

tyre inflating pressure.

WARNING

If the pressure is too low thetyre overheats and this can

cause it serious damage.

WARNING

Do not cross switch thetyres, moving them from the

right of the car to the left and viceversa.

WARNING

Never submit alloy rims torepainting treatments re-

quiring to use temperatures exceed-ing 150°C since the mechanical prop-erties of the wheels could be im-paired.

WARNING

231

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

WINDSCREEN/REAR WINDOWWIPERS

BLADES

Periodically clean the rubber part usingspecial products; TUTELA PROFES-SIONAL SC 35 is recommended.

If the rubber blades are bent or worn theyshould be replaced. In any case theyshould be changed once a year.

A few simple notions can reduce the pos-sibility of damage to the blades:

❒ if the temperature fall below zero,make sure that ice has not frozen therubber against glass. If necessary, thawusing an antifreeze product;

❒ remove any snow from the glass: in ad-dition to protecting the blades, this pre-vents effort on the motor and over-heating;

❒ do not operate the windscreen andrear window wipers on dry glass.

Changing the windscreen wiper blades

Proceed as follows:

❒ raise the windscreen wiper arm A-fig.22 and position the blade so that itforms an angle of 90° with the arm;

❒ press tab B of the coupling spring andremove the blade to be replaced fromthe arm A;

❒ fit the new blade by inserting the tab in-to the special slot in the arm. Make sureit is properly locked into place.

For certain versions, to replace the bladesproceed as follows:

❒ raise the windscreen wiper arm and po-sition the blade so that it forms an an-gle of 90° with the arm;

❒ press tabs A-fig. 23 (set aside theblade) and remove the blade to be re-placed from the arm;

❒ fit the new blade and check it is prop-erly locked into place.

Driving with worn wiperblades is a serious hazard,

because visibility is reduced in badweather.

WARNING

fig. 22 F0C0162m fig. 23 F0C0507m

232

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

Changing the rear window blade

Proceed as follows:

❒ raise the cover A-fig. 24 and removethe arm from the car, slackening the nutB that fastens it to the pivot pin;

❒ fit the new arm, positioning it correct-ly, and fully tighten the nut;

❒ lower the cover.

SPRAY NOZZLES

Windscreen wiper fig. 25

If the jet of fluid is inadequate, firstly checkthat there is fluid in the reservoir: see“Checking fluid levels” in this section).

Then check that the nozzle holes are notclogged, if necessary use a needle.

The windscreen jets are directed by ad-justing the angle of the nozzles: turn thenozzle cylinder by inserting a screwdriv-er in A.

Fluid jets shall be directed at about 1/3height from the window upper edge.

Rear window wiper fig. 26-27

Rear window washer jets can be adjust-ed in the same way.

The nozzle holder is on the rear window.


fig. 27 F0C0350m

233

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

BODYWORK

PROTECTION FROMATMOSPHERIC AGENTS

The main causes of corrosion are the fol-lowing:

❒ atmospheric pollution;

❒ salty air and humidity (coastal areas, orhot humid climates);

❒ seasonal environment conditions.

Not to be underestimated is also the abra-sive action of wind-borne atmosphericdust and sand and mud and gravel raisedby other cars.

On your car, Fiat implemented the bestmanufacturing technologies to effectivelyprotect the bodywork against corrosion.

These include:

❒ Painting products and systems whichgive the car particular resistance to cor-rosion and abrasion;

❒ Use of galvanised (or pretreated) steelsheets, with high resistance to corro-sion;

❒ Spraying the underbody, engine com-partment, wheelhouse internal partsand other parts with highly protectivewax products;

❒ Spraying of plastic parts, with a protec-tive function, in the more exposedpoints: underdoor, inner fender parts,edges, etc.;

❒ Use of “open” boxed sections to pre-vent condensation and pockets of mois-ture from triggering rust inside.

BODY AND UNDERBODYWARRANTY

Your car is covered by warranty againstperforation due to rust of any original el-ement of the structure or body. For thegeneral terms of this warranty, refer tothe Fiat Warranty booklet.

ADVICE FOR PRESERVING THE BODYWORK

Paint

Paintwork does not only serve an aesteth-ic purpose, but also protects the under-lying sheet metal.

In the case of deep scrapes or scores, youare advised to have the necessary touch-ing up carried out immediately to avoidthe formation of rust. Use only originalpaint products for touching up (see “Body-work paint identification plate” in section“Technical specification”).

Normal paint maintenance consists inwashing at intervals depending on the con-ditions and environment of use. For ex-ample, in highly polluted areas, or if theroads are sprayed with salt, it is wise towash the car more frequently.

234

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

To correctly wash the car:

❒ remove the aerial from the roof to pre-vent damage to it if the car is washed inan automatic system;

❒ wash the body using a low pressure jetof water;

❒ wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy so-lution over the bodywork, frequentlyrinsing with the sponge;

❒ rinse well with water and dry with a jetof air or a chamois leather.

When drying, take particular care with theless visible parts like door surrounds, bon-net and around the headlights where wa-ter may stagnate. The car should not betaken to a closed area immediately, but leftin the open so that residual water canevaporate.

Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned inthe same way as the rest of the car.

Where possible, do not park under trees;the resinous substance many species re-lease give the paint a dull appearance andincrease the possibility of triggering rustprocesses.

IMPORTANT Bird droppings must bewashed off immediately and thoroughly asthe acid they contain is particularly ag-gressive.

Front headlights

IMPORTANT Never use aromatic sub-stances (e.g.: petrol) or ketones (e.g.: ace-tone) for cleaning front headlight plasticlens.

Windows

Use specific window cleaner products.Use also clean cloths to avoid scratchingthe glass or damaging the transparency.

IMPORTANT The inside of therearscreen should be wiped gently with acloth in the direction of the filaments toavoid damaging the heating device.

Engine compartment

At the end of the winter the engine com-partment should be carefully washed,without directing the jet against electron-ic control units. Contact a specialisedworkshop to have this done.

IMPORTANT The car should be washedwith the engine cold and the ignition keyat STOP. After washing make sure thatthe various protections (e.g. rubber capsand various covers) have not been dam-aged or removed.

Detergents cause waterpollution. Therefore the carshould be washed in areasequipped for collecting and

purifying the liquid used in the wash-ing process.

Do not wash the car after it has been leftin the sun or with the bonnet hot: this mayalter the shine of the paintwork.

235

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

INTERIORS

Periodically check that water is not trappedunder the mats (due to water dripping offshoes, umbrellas, etc.) which could causeoxidisation of the sheet metal.

CLEANING SEATS AND FABRICAND VELVET PARTS

Use a soft brush or vacuum cleaner to re-move dust. Velvet is cleaned better if thebrush is moistened.

Rub the seats with a sponge moistenedwith a solution of water and neutral de-tergent.

CLEANING LEATHER SEATS

Remove dried on dirt with lightly moist-ened chamois leather or cloth withoutpressing too hard.

Remove liquid or grease stains with a dryabsorbent cloth without rubbing. Thenwipe with a soft cloth or chamois leatherwith water and neutral soap.

If the stain persists, use specific products,carefully following the instructions for use.

IMPORTANT Never use spirit or alcohol-based products.



236

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

TECHN

ICAL

SPEC

IFICA

TIONS

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

INTERIOR PLASTIC PARTS

For routine cleaning of interior plasticparts use a soft cloth moistened with wa-ter and neutral soap. Remove grease orpersisting stains using appropriate solvent-free products designed to preserve ap-pearance and colour of plastic compo-nents.

IMPORTANT Never use spirit or petro-leum to clean the instrument panel.

STEERING WHEEL/GEAR LEVERKNOB WITH GENUINELEATHER COVERING

These components shall only be cleanedwith water and neutral soap. Never usespirit or alcohol-based products.

Before using special products for clean-ing interiors, read carefully label instruc-tions and indications to make sure theyare free from spirit and/or alcohol-basedsubstances.

If when cleaning the windscreen with spe-cial glass products, some drops fall on theleather covering of the steering wheel/gearlever knob remove them immediately andthen clean with water and neutral soap.

IMPORTANT Take the utmost care whenengaging the steering lock to preventscratching the leather covering.

Do not keep aerosol cans inthe car: they might explode.

Aerosol cans must never be exposedto a temperature above 50°C. Thetemperature inside the car exposedto the sun may go well beyond thatfigure.

WARNING

Never use flammable prod-ucts like oil ether or rectified

petrol for cleaning car interiors. Elec-trostatic discharges generated by rub-bing during cleaning operations couldcause fire.

WARNING

237

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

IDENTIFICATION DATA ................................................... 238

ENGINE CODES - BODYWORK VERSIONS .............. 240

ENGINE .................................................................................... 241

FUEL FEED/IGNITION ........................................................ 243

TRANSMISSION .................................................................... 243

BRAKES ..................................................................................... 244

SUSPENSIONS......................................................................... 244

STEERING................................................................................. 244

WHEELS .................................................................................... 245

DIMENSIONS .......................................................................... 250

PERFORMANCE..................................................................... 253

WEIGHTS ................................................................................. 254

CAPACITIES ........................................................................... 257

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS............................................... 259

FUEL CONSUMPTION ........................................................ 261

CO2 EMISSIONS .................................................................... 263

TTEECCHHNNIICCAALL SSPPEECCIIFFIICCAATTIIOONNSS

MODEL PLATE fig. 2

The plate is to be found on the frontcrossmember of the engine compartmentand bears the following identification da-ta:

A Manufacturer’ name.

B Homologation number.

C Vehicle type code.

D Chassis number.

E Maximum vehicle weight fully loaded.

F Maximum vehicle weight fully loadedwith trailer.

G Maximum vehicle weight on front axle.

H Maximum vehicle weight on rear axle.

I Engine type.

L Body version code.

M Spare part code.

N Smoke opacity index (for diesel en-gines).

IDENTIFICATION DATA

You are advised to note the identificationcodes. The identification data stamped andgiven on the plates and their position arethe following fig. 1:

❒ Model plate

❒ Chassis marking

❒ Bodywork paint identification plate

❒ Engine marking.

238

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

fig. 1 F0C0195m fig. 2 F0C0099m

BODYWORK PAINTIDENTIFICATION PLATE fig. 4

The plate is applied inside the bonnet andit bears the following data:

A - Paint manufacturer.

B - Colour name.

C - Fiat colour code.

D - Respray and touch up code.

ENGINE MARKING

Engine marking is stamped on the cylinderblock and includes the model and thechassis number.

CHASSIS MARKING fig. 3

It is printed on the passenger compart-ment floor, near the right-hand front seat.

It can be reached by lifting the special flapin the carpeting and includes the followingdata:

❒ car model (ZFA 192000);

❒ chassis number.

239

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

fig. 4 F0C0100m

fig. 3 F0C0110m

240

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

(*) “DYNAMIC” saloon versions (**) Versions for specific markets(▲) Multi Wagon “ACTUAL” versions (❍) Multi Wagon versions(■) Versions with mechanical gearbox (❒) Selespeed versions

ENGINE CODES - BODYWORK VERSIONS

Engine codeBody version

3-door 5-door

192AXH1B 21 192BXH1B 221.416V 843A1000 192AXH1B 21B (*) 192BXH1B 22B (*)

192CXH1B 23 (❍)

192AXN1B 30 192BXN1B 311.416V (**) 192B2000 192AXN1B 30B (*) 192BXN1B 31B (*)

192CXN1B 32 (❍)

192BXR1A 371.616V 192B3000 192AXR1A 36192CXR1A 38 (❍)

1.816V 192A4000 192AXC1A 04192BXC1A 05

192CXC1A 13 (❍)

2.420V 192A2000 192AXD1A 16C (■) 192BXD1A 17C (■)192AXD12 06C (❒) 192BXD12 07C (❒)

1.9 Multijet 8V 192A8000 192AXS1A 039B192BXS1A 40B

192CXS1A 41B (❍)

1.9 Multijet 8V (**) 192B4000 192AXU1A 45 192BXU1A 46192CXU1A 47 (❍)

1.9 Multijet 16V 937A5000 192AXT1B 42192BXT1B 43

192CXT1B 44 (❍)

241

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

ENGINE

GENERAL

Engine code

Cycle

Number and layout of cylinders

Piston bore and stroke mm

Total displacement cm3

Compression ratio

Maximum power (EEC) kWHP

corresponding ratio rpm

Maximum torque (EEC) Nmkgm


Spark plugs

Fuel

1.416V

843A1000

Otto

4 in line

72.0 x 84.0

1368

11.2

7095

5800

12813

4500

NGK DCPR7E-N

Unleaded petrol 95 RON

(SpecificationEN228)

1.416V (*)

192B2000

Otto

4 in line

72.0 x 84.0

1368

11.2

6690

5500

12813

4500

NGK DCPR7E-N



1.616V

192B3000

Otto

4 in line

79 x 81.5

1598

10.5

771056200

15015.33900

BoschFQR 8 LEU 2



1.816V

192A4000

Otto

4 in line

82.0 x 82.7

1747

10.3

981336400

16216.53500

NGK BKR6EZChampionRC10YCC



2.420V

192A2000

Otto

5 in line

83 x 90.4

2446

10.5

1251706000

22122.53500

ChampionRC8BYC



(*) Version for specific markets

242

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

(*) Version for specific markets

GENERAL

Engine code

Cycle

Number and layout of cylinders

Piston bore and stroke mm

Total displacement cm3

Compression ratio

Maximum power (EEC) kWHP


Maximum torque (EEC) Nmkgm


Fuel

1.9 Multijet 8V

192A8000

Diesel

4 in line

82.0 x 90.4

1910

18

881204000

25526

2000

Diesel fuel formotor vehicles

(Specification EN590)

1.9 Multijet 16V

937A5000

Diesel

4 in line

82.0 x 90.4

1910

17.5

1101504000

30531

2000



1.9 Multijet 8V (*)

192B4000

Diesel

4 in line

82.0 x 90.4

1910

18

851154000

25526

2000



1.9 Multijet 16V (*)

Diesel

4 in line

82.0 x 90.4

1910

17.5

1001364000

30531

2000

Diesel fuel for motor vehicles


243

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

FUEL FEED/IGNITION

1.416V - 1.616V - 1.816V - 2.420V 1.9 Multijet 8V - 1.9 Multijet 16V

Fuel feedMultipoint sequential phased Direct injection with electronically

electronic injection, returnless system controlled Multijet “Common Rail”turbosupercharger and intercooler

TRANSMISSION

1.416V 2.420V 1.616V - 1.816V 1.9 Multijet16V1.9 Multijet 8V

Gearbox

Clutch

Drive

Modifications or repairs to the fuel system that are not carried out properly or do not take the system’s techni-cal specifications into account can cause malfunctions leading to the risk of fire.

Six forward gears and reverse

with synchromesh for forward gear engagement

Self-adjusting pedal without idle

stroke

Front

Five forward gears and reverse

with electronic control system

Electric-hydraulic device with

electronic control

Front

Five forward gears and reverse

with synchromesh for forward gear

engagement

Self-adjusting pedal without idle

stroke

Front

Six forward gears and reverse

with synchromesh for forward gear

engagement

Self-adjusting pedal without idle stroke

Front

244

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

SUSPENSIONS

1.416V - 1.616V - 1.816V - 2.420V - 1.9 Multijet 8V - 1.9 Multijet 16V

Front

Rear

McPherson independent wheels

Interconnected wheels with twisting axle

STEERING

1.416V 1.616V - 1.9 Multijet 8V 1.816V - 2.420V1.9 Multijet 16V

Type

Minimum steeringcycle m

BRAKES


Service brakes:

– front

– rear

Parking brake

IMPORTANT Water, ice and antifreeze salt on roads may deposit on the brake discs thus reducing braking efficiency at first braking.

Disc, self-ventilating

Disc

Controlled by hand lever, it works on the rear brakes

Rack and pinion with electric power steering

10.5


10.8


11.1

245

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

UNDERSTANDING TYRE MARKING fig. 5

Example: 195/65 R 15 91T

195 = Nominal width (S, distance be-tween sidewalls in mm).

65 = Percentage height/width ratio(H/S).

R = Radial tyre.

15 = Rim diameter in inches (Ø).

91 = Load rating.

T = Maximum speed rating.

WHEELS

RIMS AND TYRES

Pressed steel or alloy rims. Tubeless tyreswith radial carcass. The homologated tyresare listed in the Log book.

IMPORTANT In the event of discrepan-cies between the information provided onthis “Owner handbook” and the “Logbook”, consider the specifications shownin the log book only.

Attaining to the prescribed size, to ensuresafety of the car in movement, it must befitted with tyres of the same make andtype on all wheels.

IMPORTANT Do not use inner tubeswith Tubeless tyres.

SPARE WHEEL

Pressed steel rim. Tubeless tyre.

WHEEL GEOMETRY

Front wheel toe-in measured from rim torim: – 1 ±1 mm.

The values refer to the car in running or-der.

fig. 5 F0C0200m

246

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSLoad rating

60 = 250 kg 84 = 500 kg61 = 257 kg 85 = 515 kg62 = 265 kg 86 = 530 kg63 = 272 kg 87 = 545 kg64 = 280 kg 88 = 560 kg65 = 290 kg 89 = 580 kg66 = 300 kg 90 = 600 kg67 = 307 kg 91 = 615 kg68 = 315 kg 92 = 630 kg69 = 325 kg 93 = 650 kg70 = 335 kg 94 = 670 kg71 = 345 kg 95 = 690 kg72 = 355 kg 96 = 710 kg73 = 365 kg 97 = 730 kg74 = 375 kg 98 = 750 kg75 = 387 kg 99 = 775 kg76 = 400 kg 100 = 800 kg77 = 412 kg 101 = 825 kg78 = 425 kg 102 = 850 kg79 = 437 kg 103 = 875 kg80 = 450 kg 104 = 900 kg81 = 462 kg 105 = 925 kg82 = 475 kg 106 = 950 kg83 = 487 kg

Maximum speed rating

Q = up to 160 km/h.

R = up to 170 km/h.

S = up to 180 km/h.

T = up to 190 km/h.

U = up to 200 km/h.

H = up to 210 km/h.

V = up to 240 km/h.

W = up to 270 km/h.

Y = up to 300 km/h.

Maximum speed ratingfor snow tyres

QM + S = up to 160 km/h.

TM + S = up to 190 km/h.

HM + S = up to 210 km/h.

UNDERSTANDING RIM MARKING fig. 5

Example: 6 1/2 J x 15 H2 ET43

6 1/2 = rim width in inches (1).

J = rim drop center outline (sideprojection where the tyre beadrests) (2).

15 = rim nominal diameter in inches(corresponds to diameter of thetyre to be mounted) (3 = Ø).

H2 = “hump” shape and number (reliefon the circumference holding theTubeless tyre bead on the rim).

ET43 = wheel camber angle (distance be-tween the disc/rim supportingplane and the wheel rim centreline).

247

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

(*) On request for versions/markets where applicable.

VERSIONS RIMS TYRES SPARE WHEEL (*)Standard tyres Snow tyres Rim Tyre

1.416V 61/2 J x 15 ET 43 195/65 R15 91T 195/65 R15 91T (M+S)7J x 16 ET 41 205/55 R16 91V (*) 205/55 R16 91H (M+S)

4B x 15 ET 35 T/125/90 R15 96M7J x 17 ET 41 215/45 R17 87W (*) 215/45 R17 87H (M+S)7J x 17 ET 41 215/45 ZR17 87W 215/45 ZR17 87H (M+S)

1.616V 61/2 J x 15 ET 43 195/65 R15 91H 195/65 R15 91H (M+S)7J x 16 ET 41 205/55 R16 91V (*) 205/55 R16 91H (M+S) 4B x 15 ET 35 T/125/90 R15 96M7J x 17 ET 41 215/45 R17 87W (*) 215/45 R17 87H (M+S)

1.816V 61/2 J x 15 ET 43 195/65 R15 91V 195/65 R15 91H (M+S)1.9 Multijet 16V 7J x 16 ET 41 205/55 R16 91V (*) 205/55 R16 91H (M+S)

4B x 15 ET 35 T/125/90 R15 96M7J x 17 ET 41 215/45 R17 87W (*) 215/45 R17 87H (M+S)7J x 17 ET 41 215/45 ZR17 87W 215/45 ZR17 87H (M+S)

2.420V 7J x 16 ET 41 205/55 R16 91W 205/55 R16 91H (M+S)4B x 15 ET 35 T/125/90 R15 96M

7J x 17 ET 41 215/45 R17 87W (*) 215/45 R17 87H (M+S)

1.9 Multijet 8V 61/2 J x 15 ET 43 195/65 R15 91H 195/65 R15 91H (M+S)7J x 16 ET 41 205/55 R16 91V (*) 205/55 R16 91H (M+S) 4B x 15 ET 35 T/125/90 R15 96M7J x 17 ET 41 215/45 R17 87W (*) 215/45 R17 87H (M+S)

COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE (bar)

Saloon versions

248

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

Add +0.3 bar to the prescribed inflation pressure when the tyres are warm. Recheck pressure value with cold tyres.

With snow tyres, add +0.2 bar to the inflation pressure value prescribed for standard tyres.

195/65 R15 91T 1.9 1.9 2.1 2.1

1.416V 205/55 R16 91V 2.1 2.1 2.3 2.3 4.2

215/45 R17 87W 2.3 2.3 2.7 2.5

1.616V 195/65 R15 91H 1.9 1.9 2.1 2.11.9 Multijet 8V 205/55 R16 91V 2.1 2.1 2.3 2.3 4.2

215/45 R17 87W 2.3 2.3 2.7 2.5

195/65 R15 91V 1.9 1.9 2.1 2.11.816V 205/55 R16 91V 2.1 2.1 2.3 2.3 4.21.9 Multijet16V

215/45 R17 87W 2.3 2.3 2.7 2.5

2.420V205/55 R16 91W 2.1 2.1 2.3 2.3

4.2215/45 R17 87W 2.3 2.3 2.7 2.5

STANDARD TYRES SPACE-SAVERSize Medium load Full load SPAREWHEEL

Front Rear Front Rear

249

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS


Add +0.3 bar to the prescribed inflation pressure when the tyres are warm. Recheck pressure value with cold tyres.

With snow tyres, add +0.2 bar to the inflation pressure value prescribed for standard tyres.

(*) In full load conditions = 510 kg (including driver’s weight; special equipment and remaining load distributed on rear folded seats).

195/65 R15 91T 1.9 1.9 2.1 2.3/3.0 (*)

1.416V 205/55 R16 91V 2.1 2.1 2.3 2.3/3.0 (*) 4.2

215/45 R17 87W 2.3 2.3 2.7 2.5/3.0 (*)

1.616V 195/65 R15 91H 1.9 1.9 2.3 2.3/3.0 (*)1.9 Multijet 8V 205/55 R16 91V 2.1 2.1 2.3 2.3/3.0 (*) 4.2

215/45 R17 87W 2.3 2.3 2.7 2.5/3.0 (*)

195/65 R15 91V 1.9 1.9 2.3 2.3/3.0 (*)1.816V 205/55 R16 91V 2.1 2.1 2.3 2.3/3.0 (*) 4.21.9 Multijet16V

215/45 R17 87W 2.3 2.3 2.7 2.5/3.0 (*)

STANDARD TYRES SPACE-SAVERSize Medium load Full load SPAREWHEEL


250

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSDIMENSIONS

Dimensions are expressed in mm and re-fer to the car fitted with standard tyres.

The height refers to the car unladen.

Boot volume

Unladen boot volume (V.D.A. standards) ...................... 305 dm3

Extended boot volume with rear folded seat back ........1002 dm3

F0C0332mfig. 6

1.416V - 1.616V -1.816V

1.9 Multijet

2.420V

Saloon versionsA B C D E F G H3-door

4182 887 2600 695 1475 1514 (*) 1784 1508 (*)

4182 887 2600 695 1475 1518 (*) 1784 1512 (*)

(*) Track measurements may vary according to rim size.

251

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

Dimensions are expressed in mm and re-fer to the car fitted with standard tyres.The height refers to the car unladen.

Boot volume

Unladen boot volume (V.D.A. standards) .............. 370 dm3 (Õ)

370 dm3 (▲)

335 dm3 (å)

410 dm3 (ç)

Extended boot volume (with folded seatback) ...........1035 dm3 (ç)/1120 dm3 (Õ)(Õ) For versions with rear fixed seat.(▲) For versions with rear sliding seat

(rated value).(å) For versions with rear sliding seat, set

completely in backward position.(ç) For versions with rear sliding seat, set

completely in forward position.F0C0474mfig. 7

1.416V - 1.616V -1.816V

1.9 Multijet

2.420V

Saloon versionsA B C D E F G H5-door

4253 893 2600 760 1525 1514 (*) 1756 1508 (*)

4253 893 2600 760 1525 1518 (*) 1756 1512 (*)

(*) Track measurements may vary according to rim size.

252

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSDimensions are expressed in mm and re-fer to the car fitted with standard tyres.The height refers to the car unladen.

Boot volumeUnladen boot volume (V.D.A. standards) ............. 510 dm3 (Õ)

550 dm3 (▲)

Extended boot volume (with folded seat back) ............................ 1380 dm3 (å)

1480 dm3 (ç)

(Õ) For versions with rear fixed seat.

(▲) For versions with rear sliding seat(rated value).

(å) For versions with rear sliding seat, setcompletely in backward position.

(ç) For versions with rear sliding seat, setcompletely in forward position.

F0C0348mfig. 8

1.416V - 1.616V -1.816V 1.9 Multijet

Saloon versionsA B C D E F G HMulti Wagon versions

4516 893 2600 1023 1570 1514 (*) 1756/1773 (**) 1508

(*) Track measurements may vary according to rim size.(**) UPROAD versions

PERFORMANCE

Top admitted speed after initial car use in km/h.

253

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

SALOON VERSIONS

1.416V 1.616V 1.816V 2.420V 1.9 Multijet 8V 1.9 Multijet 8V (*) 1.9 Multijet 16V3-door 5-door 3-door 5-door 3-door 5-door 3-door 5-door 3-door 5-door 3-door 5-door 3-door 5-door

180 178 185 183 202 200 215 213 194 193 192 190 209 207

(*) For specific markets

MULTI WAGON VERSIONS

1.416V 1.616V 1.816V 1.9 Multijet 8V 1.9 Multijet 8V (*) 1.9 Multijet 16V

176 183 200 193 190 207

(*) For specific markets

254

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS1.416V 1.616V 1.816V

WEIGHTS

Weights (kg)(Saloon versions)

Weight empty (including fluids, 90% fuel in the tank and no optional)

Payload (*) including the driver:

Maximum admitted loads (**)– front axle:– rear axle:

– total:

Towable loads– trailer with brakes:– trailer without brakes:

Maximum load on roof (***):

Maximum load on tow hitch(trailer with brakes):

(*) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases thus reducing the specified payload.

(**) Loads not to be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging the loads in the boot an/or on the roof so that they com-ply with these limits.

(***) Lineaccessori Fiat roof rack, max capacity: 50 kg.

(❍) “DYNAMIC” versions.

(❒) For specific markets.

3-door

10901135 (❍)

510

9008301600

1645 (❍)

1000/500 (❒)500

80

60

5-door

11451190 (❍)

510

9008601655

1700 (❍)

1000/500 (❒)500

80

60

3-door

11501195 (❍)

510

9508301660

1705 (❍)

1100/500 (❒)500

80

60

5-door

12051250 (❍)

510

9508601715

1760 (❍)

1100/500 (❒)500

80

60

3-door

1240

510

9908301750

1200/500 (❒)500

80

60

5-door

1295

510

9908601805

1200/500 (❒)500

80

60

255

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

2.420V 1.9 Multijet 8V 1.9 Multijet 16VWeights (kg)(Saloon versions)




– total:








3-door

1265

510

1030830

1775

1300/500 (❒)500

80

60

3-door

1320

510

1030830

1830

1300/500 (❒)500

80

60

3-door

1265

510

1020830

1775

1300/500 (❒)500

80

60

3-door

1320

510

1020860

1830

1300/500 (❒)500

80

60

3-door

1285

510

1030830

1795

1300/500 (❒)500

80

60

3-door

1340

510

1030860

1850

1300/500 (❒)500

80

60

256

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

1.416V

1235

510

950960

1745

1000/500 (❒)500

80

60

1.616V

1295

510

950960

1805 (❍)

1100/500 (❒)500

80

60

1.816V

1385

510

990960

1895

1200/500 (❒)500

80

60

1.9 Multijet 8V

1410

510

1020960

1920

1300/500 (❒)500

80

60

1.9 Multijet 16V

1430

510

1030960

1940

1300/500 (❒)500

80

60

Weights (kg)(Multi Wagon versions)




– total:







(❍) “ACTUAL” versions


CAPACITIES

257

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

1.416V 1.616V 1.816V 2.420V

Fuel tank:including a reserve of:

Engine cooling system– with climate control:

Engine sump:Engine sump and filter:

Gearbox/differential casing:

Selespeed transmissionhydraulic system(where provided):

Hydraulic brake circuitwith ABS:

Windscreen / rear window / headlight washer fluid reservoir: (*)

(*) The values in brackets refer to versions with headlight washers.

Recommended products andgenuine lubricants

Unleaded petrol with no less than 95 R.O.N (Specification EN228)

Mixture of 50% demineralised water and 50% PARAFLU UP

SELENIA K (versions 1.416V, 1.616V and 1.816V)SELENIA RACING(versions 2.420V)

TUTELA CAR TECHNYX

TUTELA CAR CS SPEED

TUTELA TOP 4

Mixture of water and TUTELA PROFESSIONALSC 35

litres

589

–

2.52.8

1.87

–

–

3 (6)

kg

––

5.25

2.22.5

1.7

–

0.525

–

litres

589

–

4.34.5

1.65

–

–

3 (6)

kg

––

6.55

3.94.0

1.5

–

0.525

–

litres

589

–

3.74.2

1.98

–

–

3 (6)

kg

––

7.3

3.33.7

1.8

–

0.525

–

litres

589

–

4.54.7

1.76

0.8

–

3 (6)

kg

––

8.3

3.94.0

1.6

0.73

0.525

–

258

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS1.9 Multijet 8V 1.9 Multijet 16V

Fuel tank:including a reserve of:

Engine cooling system– with climate control:

Engine sump:Engine sump and filter:

Gearbox/differential casing:

Hydraulic brake circuitwith ABS:

Windscreen / rear window / headlight washer fluid reservoir: (*)

(*) The values in brackets refer to versions with headlight washers.

litres

589

–

4.44.7

1.76

–

3 (6)

kg

––

7.3

3.84.0

1.6

0.525

–

litres

589

–

4.44.7

1.87

–

3 (6)

kg

––

7.3

3.84.0

1.7

0.525

–

Recommended products andgenuine lubricants

Diesel fuel formotor vehicles(Specification EN590)

Mixture of 50% demineralised water and 50% PARAFLU UP

SELENIA WR

TUTELA CAR TECHNYX

TUTELA TOP 4

Mixture of water and TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35

259

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

RECOMMENDED PRODUCTS AND THEIR SPECIFICATIONS

Use Fluid and lubricant specifications Genuine fluids Changefor correct car operation and lubricants intervals

Lubricants for petrol engines

Lubricants fordiesel engines

As per ServiceSchedule



Synthetic-based oil, grade SAE 5W-40, that pass FIAT 9.55535-M2 specification.

Synthetic-based oil, grade SAE 10W-60

Synthetic-based oil, grade SAE 5W- 40that pass FIAT 9.55535- M2 specification

SELENIA K (❒)

SELENIA RACING (❍)

SELENIA WR

(❒) 1.416V, 1.616V and 1.816V versions(❍) 2.420V versionsFor regular operation of Multijet versions fitted with DPF, use the genuine lubricant only. In the event of an emergency, lacking thegenuine lubricant, top up just once with max. 0.5 l and go to Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.Should non-genuine SAE 5W-40 products be used, lubricants with minimum ACEA A3 properties for petrol engines and ACEA B4for Diesel engines are tolerated; in this event top engine performance is not guaranteed.

Using low-quality products, not compliant with ACEA A3 and ACEA B4 properties and specifications could cause engine damagesnot covered by warranty.

For very cold temperatures, consult Fiat Dealership for the proper Selenia product to use.

Lubricants and greases for transmissions

260

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSUse Fluid and lubricant specifications Genuine fluids Applications

for correct car operation and lubricants

(●) Do not add or mix fluids having different specifications from that already existing.

Synthetic-based oil, grade SAE 75W-85that passes API GL-4 PLUS, FIAT 9.55550 MIL-L- 2105 D LEV specifications.

Specific fluid with “ATF DEXRON III”

Lithium soap based grease. NLGI 0 consistency

Poly-urea oil synthetic-based grease suitable for high temperatures. NLGI 2 consistency

Molibdenum disulphide, lithium soap based grease. NLGI 2 consistency

Synthetic fluid, FMVSS n° 116 DOT 4, ISO 4925SAE J1704, CUNA NC 956-01

Protective with antifreeze action, red colour based on inhibited monoethylen glycol and organic formula, O.A.T technology, that passes CUNA NC 956-16, ASTM D 3306 specifications.

Additive for diesel fuels with protective action for Diesel engines

Mixture of alcohol and surfactants CUNA NC 956-II

TUTELA CAR TECHNYX

TUTELA CAR CS SPEED

TUTELA MRM ZERO

TUTELA STAR 325

TUTELA STAR 500

TUTELA TOP 4

PARAFLU UP (●)

DIESEL MIX

TUTELA PROFESSIONALSC 35

Mechanical gearbox and differential

Selespeed transmission electrically-operated electrohydraulic actuator

CV joints on differentialside (excluding version 1.816V)

CV joints on differentialside submitted to high temperatures (only versions 1.616V)

CV joint on wheel side (excluding version 1.816V)

Brake and clutch hydraulic controls

Cooling circuits. Proportion:50% down to –35° C. Not to be mixed withother products.

To be mixed with diesel fuel (25 cc per 10 litres)

To be used diluted or undiluted

Windscreen/rear window/headlight washer fluid

Additive for diesel fuel

Protectiveagent for radiators

Brake fluid

261

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

FUEL CONSUMPTION

The fuel consumption figures given in thetable below are determined on the basisof the homologation tests set down byspecific European Directives.

The procedures below are followed formeasuring consumption:

❒ urban cycle: cold starting followed bydriving that simulates urban use of thecar;

IMPORTANT The type of route, trafficsituations, weather conditions, drivingstyle, general conditions of the car, trimlevel/equipment/accessories, load, climatecontrol system, roof rack, other situationsthat affect air drag may lead to differentfuel consumption levels than those mea-sured.

❒ extra-urban cycle: frequent acceler-ating in all gears, simulating extraurbanuse of the car; the speed varies be-tween 0 and 120 km/h;

❒ combined consumption: is calculat-ed weighing about 37% of urban cycleconsumption and about 63% of ex-traurban consumption.

Fuel consumption according to Directive 1999/100/EC (litres x 100 km)

Saloon versions

Urban

Extra-urban

Combined

1.416V 1.616V 1.816V

3-door 5-door 3-door 5-door 3-door 5-door

8.2/8.5 (*) 8.5 8.8 9.1 11.3 11.5

5.5/5.6 (*) 5.7 5.5 5.8 6.1 6.2

6.5/6.6 (*) 6.7 6.7 7.0 8.0 8.1

(*) “DYNAMIC” versions

262

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

Urban

Extra-urban

Combined

Fuel consumption according to Directive 1999/100/EC (litres x 100 km)


Urban

Extra-urban

Combined

1.416V 1.616V 1.816V 1.9 Multijet 8V 1.9 Multijet 16V

8.7 9.2 11.7 7.1 7.7

5.8 6.0 6.3 4.7 4.7

6.8 7.2 8.3 5.6 5.8

2.420V 1.9 Multijet 8V 1.9 Multijet 16V


13.5 13.6 6.7 6.8 7.5 7.7

7.6 7.6 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.7

9.7 9.8 5.3 5.4 5.6 5.8

263

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

CO2 EMISSIONS

The CO2, emission levels at the exhaust given in the following table refer to combined consumption.

CO2 emissions according to 1999/100/EC Directive (g/km)

Saloon versions

(*) “DYNAMIC” versions

1.416V 1.616V 1.816V


153/158 (*) 160 159 165 190 194

2.420V 1.9 Multijet 8V 1.9 Multijet 16V


231 233 139 142 148 154


1.416V 1.616V 1.816V 1.9 Multijet 8V 1.9 Multijet 16V

162 170 197 148 154

264

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YCA

RMA

INTE

NANC

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

– types of bulbs .................................. 182

Capacities .............................................. 257Car inactivity.......................................... 156Car maintenance ............................. 209

– additional checks ............................ 213– annual Inspection Schedule.......... 213– scheduled service ........................... 210– Service Schedule............................. 211

Cargo box .............................................. 91Carrying children safely ...................... 116Ceiling lights ......................................... 67Central door locking system ............ 79Checking fluid levels ........................... 216Child lock .............................................. 79Child restraint systems

(specifications for use) .................... 119Cigar lighter .......................................... 72Climate control system

– automatic two-zone climate control system ................ 51

– manual climate control system .. 48CO2 emissions ..................................... 263Code Card ............................................ 10Containing running costs ................... 149

Controls ................................................ 68Correct use of the car ................. 135Courtesy mirror light

(bulb replacement) ............................ 194Cruise Control .................................... 65Current outlet....................................... 72Cut-off switch fuel .............................. 69

Dashboard............................................. 5Dashboard and controls .............. 4Daylight sensor .................................... 61Dead lock (device) .............................. 14Diesel fuel filter..................................... 225Diesel particulate filter (DPF) ........... 108Dimensions ........................................... 250Dipped beam headlights...................... 59Direction indicators

– control ............................................. 60– front bulb replacement ................ 186– rear bulb replacement ................. 188– side bulb replacement .................. 186

Doors ..................................................... 79Dualdrive (electric power steering) 102

Easy entry ............................................ 38

ABS ........................................................ 95Accessories purchasedby the owner ......................................... 101Air bags

– front................................................... 126– side..................................................... 130

Air filter .................................................. 225Armrests (front rear) .......................... 70Ashtray.................................................... 72ASR .......................................................... 98At the filling station.............................. 105Automatic headlights sensor

(daylight sensor)................................. 611

Battery– checking the charge....................... 226– jump starting.................................... 170– replacing .......................................... 227

Bodywork............................................... 233Bonnet..................................................... 92Boot ......................................................... 81Boot light (bulb replacement) ........... 195Brake Assist ........................................... 96Brakes...................................................... 244Bulb (replacement)............................... 181

IINNDDEEXX

265

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YCA

RMA

INTE

NANC

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

Gearbox– using manual gearbox .................. 140– using Selespeed gearbox ............. 141

Glass holder .......................................... 73Glove box light

(bulb replacement) ............................ 194Glove box/oddment

compartments ................................... 71

Handbrake ........................................... 139Hazard lights ......................................... 68Head restraints ..................................... 41Headlight washer.................................. 65Headlights............................................... 94Heating and ventilation system .. 44-46

Identification data ............................... 238If an exterior light burns out ............. 184If an interior light burns out .............. 192Ignition switch ...................................... 20In an emergency ............................. 169Independent additional heater ......... 56Installation of electric/

electronic devices .............................. 101Instrument panel ................................. 6Instruments ........................................... 21Interior fittings ..................................... 70Interiors ................................................. 235

Isofix (child restraint system) ........... 121

Jacking the car ..................................... 206

Keys ....................................................... 10

Load limiters ....................................... 113

Main beam headlights......................... 59

MSR (system) ....................................... 99

Multifunction display ........................... 23

Number plate lights (bulb replacement) ............................ 191

OCS (Occupant Classification System) .. 129

Oddment compartments .................. 73

Paint ...................................................... 233

Parking ................................................... 139

Parking lights ......................................... 69

Parking sensors .................................... 103

Performance ......................................... 253

Pollen filter ............................................ 225

Power windows ................................... 80

Presetting for mounting the“Isofix ” child restraint system ...... 121

Electric power steering “Dualdrive”.. 102Electronic alarm ................................... 17Engine

– identification code ........................ 240– technical data......................... 241-242

Engine compartment– washing ............................................ 234

Engine oil– consumption .................................. 220

Environment protection .................... 108EOBD (system) .................................... 99ESP (system) ......................................... 97External lights ....................................... 59

Fiat CODE (system) .......................... 8Fire extinguisher .................................. 208Fix&Go automatic ............................... 177Flashing the headlights ........................ 59Fluid level checks ................................. 216Fluids and lubricants ........................... 259Follow me home (device) ................. 60Front fog lights ............................... 68-69

– (bulb replacement)......................... 186Fuel consumption ................................. 261Fuel feed/ignition ................................. 241Fuel filler cap ........................................ 106Fuses (replacement) ........................... 196

266

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARIN

AN

EMER

GENC

YCA

RMA

INTE

NANC

ETEC

HNICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

Seats ........................................................ 37– cleaning ............................................ 235– easy entry......................................... 38– manually adjustable front seats .. 37– rear sliding seats ............................ 39– seat warming ................................. 38

Selespeed (gearbox) ........................... 141Side/taillights .......................................... 59Ski tunnel ................................................ 91Skywindow (blade sunroof) .............. 74Smart washing ...................................... 63Snow chains .......................................... 155Sound system (presetting).................. 100Spark plugs ............................................. 241Starting the engine ............................... 136Steering .................................................. 244Steering column lock .......................... 20Steering wheel....................................... 42Sun visors .............................................. 73Sunroof (Skywindow) ......................... 74Suspensions ........................................... 244Symbols .................................................. 8

Technical specifications ............. 237 Third brake light

(bulb replacement) ............................ 191Tilting shelf ............................................ 72

Top speeds ............................................ 253Towing the car ...................................... 206Towing trailers ...................................... 151Transmission ........................................ 241Trip Computer...................................... 34Tyre repair kit

(Fix&Go automatic)........................... 177Tyres

– changing ............................................ 171– pressure............................................ 246– snow tyres ....................................... 154– standard tyres ................................. 247– understanding tyre marking......... 246

Using the manual gearbox ............... 140Using the Selespeed gearbox ........... 141

Warning lights and messages .. 157 Weights................................................... 254Wheel

– changing ............................................ 171Wheel geometry................................... 245Window (washing/cleaning) ........ 62-234Windscreen washer/wiper................. 62Windscreen wiper

– blades ................................................ 231– control .............................................. 62– nozzles .............................................. 232

Presetting for mounting the “Universal Isofix”child restraint system ...................... 124

Pretensioners ....................................... 113Protecting the environment ............. 108Puddle light/door opening light

(bulb replacement) ............................ 195

Radio transmitters and cellular telephones............................. 101

Rain sensor ........................................... 63Rear fog lights........................................ 69Rear window washer/wiper............... 64Rear window wiper

– blades ............................................... 231– control ............................................. 64– nozzles ............................................. 232

Rearview mirrors ................................. 43Reversing lights

(bulb replacement) ..................... 188-189Rims

– understanding rim marking.......... 246Roof rack/ski rack ............................... 93Rubber hoses ....................................... 230

Safety devices .................................. 109S.B.R. system ........................................ 112Seat belts ................................................ 110

INSTRUMENT PANEL(right-hand drive versions)

1.416V - 1.616V - 1.816V versions

A Rev. counter

B Fuel level gauge with reservewarning light

C Engine coolant temperature gauge andexcessive temperature warning light



For markets where provided, the speedome-ter (speed indicator) can have the gradu-ated scale in km/h instead of MPH.

1.9 Multijet versions

A Rev. counter

B Fuel level gauge with reserve warninglight




For markets where provided, the speedome-ter (speed indicator) can have the gradu-ated scale in km/h instead of MPH.

F0C0524m

F0C0525m

F0C0526m

2.420V Selespeed ABARTH versions

A Rev. counter

B Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light


D Speedometer

E Multifunction display

For markets where provided, thespeedometer (speed indicator) can havethe graduated scale in km/h instead ofMPH.

PROVISIONS FOR THE PROCESSING OF A VEHICLE AT THE END OF ITS LIFE-CYCLE

For years now Fiat has been developing its global commitment towards the safeguarding and protection of the Environment throughthe continuous improvement of its production processes and the making of increasingly more “eco friendly” products. With a view toguaranteeing the best possible service to clients in full observance of environmental standards and in response to the obligations im-posed by European Directive 2000/53/EC on end-of-life vehicles, Fiat offers its clients the possibility to hand in their vehicle* at the endof its life span without additional costs.

The European Directive, in fact, provides for the take-back of the vehicle without the last holder or owner of the same incurring expenses due to the fact that the market value of the vehicle is zero or negative. In particular, in almost all of the countries of the European Union, up until 1st January 2007, take-back of the vehicle free of charge only applies to vehicles registered from 1 July 2002on, while, from 2007 on, take-back will be carried out free of charge, independently of the year of registration, provided that the vehi-cle still contains all its essential component parts (especially engine and body) and is free from additional waste materials.

Our contracted network of authorised treatment facilities has been carefully selected in order to provide a quality service to our cus-tomers by de-polluting and recycling “End of Life Vehicles” to approved environmental standards. To find out the location of yournearest authorised treatment facility, offering free of charge take-back, simply contact one of our dealers or refer to the Fiat web siteor call the toll free number 00800 3428 0000.

* Passenger transportation vehicles to seat a max. of nine persons, having a total admissible weight of 3.5 t

ENGINE OIL CHANGE


Tank capacity 58

Reserve 9Only refuel cars with petrol engines with unleaded petrol with octane rating (RON) not less than 95.Only refuel cars with diesel engines with diesel fuel for motor vehicles conforming to the EN590 European Specification.

REFUELLING (litres)

195/65 R15 91T

205/55 R16 91V

195/65 R15 91H (❒)

215/45 R17 87W

195/65 R15 91H

205/55 R16 91V

215/45 R17 87W

195/65 R15 91V

205/55 R16 91V

215/45 R17 87W

205/55 R16 91W

215/45 R17 87W

1.9

2.1

1.9

2.3

1.9

2.1

2.3

1.9

2.1

2.3

2.1

2.3

1.9

2.1

1.9

2.3

1.9

2.1

2.3

1.9

2.1

2.3

2.1

2.3

2.1 - 2.3 (❒)/3.0 (**)

2.3

2.1 - 2.3 (❒)/3.0 (**)

2.7

2.1 - 2.3 (❒)/3.0 (**)

2.3

2.7

2.1 - 2.3 (❒)/3.0 (**)

2.3

2.7

2.3

2.7

2.1 - 2.3 (❒)/3.0 (**)

2.3

2.1 - 2.3 (❒)/3.0 (**)

2.5

2.1 - 2.3 (❒)/3.0 (**)

2.3

2.5

2.1 - 2.3 (❒)/3.0 (**)

2.3

2.5

2.3

2.5

4.2

4.2

4.2

4.2

1.416V

1.9 Multijet 8V

1.616V

1.816V

1.9 Multijet 16V

2.420V

VERSIONS STANDARD TYRES SPARESize Medium load Full load WHEEL


Fiat Auto S.p.A.Quality - Assistenza Tecnica - Ingegneria Assistenziale

Largo Senatore G. Agnelli, 5 - 10040 Volvera - Torino (Italia)Print No. 603.81.012 - XI/2006 - 2nd Edition

1.416V 1.616V 1.816V 2.420V 1.9 Multijet 8V

1.9 Multijet 16V

litres kg litres kg litres kg litres kg litres kg

Engine sump 2.5 2.2 4.3 3.9 3.7 3.3 4.5 3.9 4.4 3.8

Engine sump and filter 2.8 2.5 4.9 4.4 4.2 3.7 4.7 4.0 4.7 4.0

(❒) Multi Wagon Versions(**) Under maximum load conditions = 510 kg (comprising driver’s weight. special equipment and the remaining load distributed over the rear pulled down seats).

Documents

001-022 STILO GB - Fiat Forumdownload.fiatforum.bg/Books/Stilo/Stilo_Handbook_En.pdf · Fiat Stilo technological features. You are recommended to read carefully the warnings and indications,